PEP人教版三年级英语上册精品教案全套（共246页）

PEP人教版三年级英语上册精品教案全套（共246页）

3 Unit 1 Hello! 教材分析 本单元学习的主题是打招呼、自我介绍以及道别。教学内容主要是围绕着主线人物在学校 里经历的事来展开的。教学重点是能够听懂、会说核心句型“Hello!/Hi! I'm…”“—What's your name? —My name is…”“Goodbye./Bye.”；能够听、说、认读词汇“ruler, pencil, eraser, crayon, bag, pen, pencil box, book”。 教学目标 知识与能力目标: 句型 ·能听懂、会说句型“Hello!/Hi! I'm…”“—What's your name? —My name is…”“Goodbye./B 词汇 ·能听、说、认读词汇“ruler, pencil, eraser, crayon, bag, pen, pencil box, book” 字母与语音 ·能够按顺序说出 26 个字母 能力目标： ·能够在情境中运用句型“Hello!”和“Hi!”与别人打招呼 ·能够在情境中运用句型“I'm…”介绍自己 ·能够在情境中运用句型“What's your name?”询问别人的姓名，用“My name is…”回应 别人的询问 ·会唱英文歌曲《ABC song》 课时安排 第一课时: Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play 第二课时: Part A Let’s learn & Let’s chant 第三课时: Part A Let’s sing & Let’s find out 第四课时: Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play 第五课时: Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do 第六课时: Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing The first period(第一课时) Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let's talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够通过听录音，学会用正确的语音、语调朗读对话，并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够听懂、会说核心句型“Hello!/Hi! I’m…” ·能够在情景中运用“Hello!/Hi!”与别人打招呼并运用句型“I'm…”介绍自己 Let’s play ·能够在模拟或真实的情景中运用“Hello!/Hi!”与别人打招呼并运用句型“I'm…”介绍 自己 ▶教学重点 1. 能够理解和掌握本课时的重点句型。 2. 能够在情景中运用“Hello!/Hi!”与别人打招呼并运用句型“I’m…”介绍自己。 ▶教学难点 能够在日常生活中自然地运用本课时句型进行交际。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hello, boys and girls. I'm your English teacher. Nice to see you! My Chinese name is… My English name is… You can call me Miss/Mr… I come from… I am very happy to come here to study with you. I'm interested in sports, music and climbing mountains. I also enjoy dancing. I would love to play with you. I hope I can become your friend soon. Thank you very much. （课件出示：教师的中英文名以及与上述相关的图片） Students try to say hello or hi to the teacher. T: Hello! /Hi! You can say hello or hi to me! Have a try! 2. Teach “Stand up! / Sit down!”. Help students get the meanings of the sentences “Stand up!” “Sit down!” by body language. T: Now let's play the game “I say, you do”. Let students do the actions according to the instructions. 3. Talk about some English words in our life. T: Boys and girls, English is everywhere in our daily life. What English words do you know or find in our life? Teaching purpose 课前用一段流利的英文 进行自我介绍，激发学生对 教师的好奇心，拉近与学生 的距离，给学生留下深刻的 印象，从而激发学生学习英 语的兴趣。 Teaching purpose 引导学生发现身边的英 语，以他们已有的知识为切 入点，对学生进行英语学习 的启蒙。 5 Lead students to say some simple words they know, such as hello, hi, yes, no, bye… 4. Share some pictures. T: English is very common in our daily life. Look at the pictures on the screen, please. Show some pictures on the PPT. （课件出示：生活中常见的与英语有 关的事物的图片） Lead students to talk about them. T: You see, English is close to us. English is so easy! We all can learn it well. Step 2: Presentation 1. Meet some new friends. T: Today, we'll meet some new friends. Who are they? Let's have a look! Show the main scene of Unit 1 on the PPT. （课件出示：教材 Unit 1 的主情景图） Let students look at the picture carefully and describe what they see in Chinese. Take out some headdresses. (1) Pick up the headdress of Wu Yifan and say, “Look at this boy. He is a Chinese boy. He is Wu Yifan.” Write down “Wu Yifan” on the blackboard. Wear the headdress of Wu Yifan and say, “Hello, everyone! I'm Wu Yifan.” Write down “I'm…” on the blackboard and teach it. Lead students to say hello to “Wu Yifan”. Then let different students wear the headdress of Wu Yifan and greet the class with “Hello, I'm Wu Yifan.” (2) Take out the headdress of Sarah and say, “Look, here's a girl. She is Sarah.” Write down “Sarah” on the blackboard. Wear the headdress of Sarah and say, “Hi, everyone! I'm Sarah.” Lead students to say hi to “Sarah”. Then let different students wear the headdress of Sarah and greet the class with “Hi, I'm Sarah.” (3) Point to the picture of Miss White and say, “Who is she? Can you guess?” Ss: … T: Good! This is Miss White. Write down “Miss White” on the blackboard and teach the pronunciation. Wear the headdress of Miss White and say, “Hi, everyone! I'm Miss White.” Lead students to say hi to “Miss White”. Then let different students wear the headdress of Miss White and greet the class with “Hi, I'm Miss White.” (4) Point to the other characters in the main scene and teach their names. Teaching purpose 通过人物头饰介绍课 本主线人物，并对本课核心 句型“Hello!/Hi! I'm…”进 行预热。 Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观 察并讨论图片，培养学生的 观察能力。 Teaching purpose 通过分享大量生活中常 见的与英语有关的事物图 片，让学生意识到英语贴近 我们的生活实际并且易于学 习，进一步增强学生学习英 语的信心。 2. Look and say. Show the picture of “Let's talk” on the PPT. （课件出示：教 材 P4 Let's talk 板块的图片） T: Boys and girls. Please look at the picture carefully. Who can you see in the picture? S1: Wu Yifan. S2: Sarah. S3: Miss White. T: Well done! 3. Watch and do. (1) Watch and answer. T: They are in the classroom. What are they doing? Let's have a look! Play the cartoon of “Let's talk” for the first time. （课件出 示：教材 P4 Let's talk 板块的视频） T: What are they doing? Ss: … T: Yes. They are greeting each other. How do they greet? Miss White says… Ss: “Hello, I'm Miss White.” T: You're so clever! And Wu Yifan says… Ss: “Hello, I'm Wu Yifan.” … (2) Watch and match. Let students watch the cartoon again and match the pictures to the names. Check the answers on the PPT. 4. Read and act. (1)Play the recording of “Let’s talk”. (出示课件) Let students read after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the dialogue by themselves. (3) Let students practice the dialogue in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out the dialogue in class. Step 3: Practice 1. Let’s play. Teaching purpose 首先引导学生带着问 题观看动画，整体感知文 本，然后完成人物图片与其 名字配对的练习，加深对人 物的记忆。 Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读,引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读对话，并能 在小组中进行角色扮演。 7 (1) Take out the headdresses of some other characters in this book. Introduce these characters: Zoom, Chen Jie, Mike, Mr Jones, John, Zip. Remind students to pay attention to the writing form of Chinese and English names. (2)Play the cartoon of “Let’s play”. （课件出示：教材 P4 Let's play 板块的视频）Let students read after it. (3) Let students practice the dialogue by themselves. (4) Let students wear different headdresses and role-play, and then show it to the class. A: Hello, I’m… B: Hi, I’m… 2. Pass the flower. Listen to the music and pass the flower. When the teacher says “Stop!”, the student who gets the flower should stand up and introduce himself/herself by using “Hello/Hi, I’m…” The others should say “Hello！/Hi! …” Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Chain work. Students work in groups and greet each other in a chain. S1: Hello, I'm… S2: Hi, I'm… Hello, I'm… S3: Hi, I'm… Hello, I'm… … The fastest group can get a prize. 2. Dubbing show. Show some pictures of cartoon characters on the PPT. （课件出示： 一些卡通人物的图片） Let students imitate the cartoon characters and do a dubbing show by using the sentence structure “Hello/Hi, I'm…” 3. Enjoy the song—Hello！ （课件出示：教材 P10 Let’s sing 板块 的歌曲） Lead students to sing and dance. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let's talk”. 2. Sing the song Hello! to your family. Teaching purpose 创设真实的情景，以学 生熟悉的卡通人物为切入 点，让学生在真实的情景中 操练句型，培养学生的综合 语言运用能力。最后在歌声 Teaching purpose 通过角色扮演、击鼓传 花的小游戏操练句型，活跃 课堂气氛，调动学生的学习 积极性,激发学生的学习兴 趣。 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应 课时作业) ▶教学反思 1 以教师自我介绍为导入，引发学生的好奇心，拉近师生距离。 2 以生活中常见的英语为切入点展开启蒙教学，贴近学生的生活实际，激发学生的学习兴趣，增强其学习英 语的自信。 3 活动设计丰富，易操作，且具备层次感，既活跃了课堂气氛，又有效地提升了学生的核心素养。 4 突出学生的主体地位，注重引导学生和对学生的学习方法进行指导。 5 板书设计清晰明了，重点突出，起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the picture. · Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. · Be able to understand and read the key sentence structure “Hello/Hi, I'm…” ·Be able to use “Hello!/Hi!” to greet others and use the sentence structure “I'm…” to introduce themselves in situations. Let’s play ·Be able to use “Hello!/Hi!” to greet others and use the sentence structure “I'm…” to introduce themselves in simulated or real situations. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key sentence structures of this lesson. ·Be able to use “Hello!/Hi!” to greet others and use the sentence structure “I’m…” to introduce themselves in situations. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to apply the sentence structures of this lesson to real situations. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. Make a self-introduction to the class. 2. Teach “Stand up! /Sit down!” by body language. 3. Talk about some English words in our life. Lead students to say some simple words they know. 4. Share some pictures. 1. Greetings. Try to say hello or hi to the teacher. 2. Learn “Stand up! / Sit down!” by body language. 3. Try to say some simple words they know. 4. Look at some pictures and talk about them. Use the self-introduction to arouse students' curiosity about the teacher and stimulate students' interest in learning. Let students realize that English is common in our daily life and further enhance students' confidence in learning English. 99 Presentation 1. Meet some new friends. Show the main scene of Unit 1 on the PPT. Wear the headdresses of Wu Yifan, Sarah and Miss White to greet the class. Point to the other characters in the main scene and teach their names. Try to remember the new friends in the textbook and say hello or hi to them. Introduce the key characters and preliminarily perceive the key sentence structure “Hello/Hi, I'm…” 2. Look and say. Show the picture of “Let's talk” on the PPT. Ask a question to lead students to talk about the picture. Observe and talk about the picture with the teacher. Cultivate students' observation ability by observing and talking about the picture. 3. Watch and do. (1)Play the cartoon of “Let’s talk”for the first time. Ask some questions. (2) Play the cartoon again. Let students match the pictures to the names. Check the answers. (1) Watch the cartoon and answer the questions. (2) Watch the cartoon again and match the pictures to the names. Help students get an overall perception of the text. Strengthen students' memory of the characters. Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 4. Read and act. Play the recording of “Let’s talk”. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Read after the recording. Pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Read the dialogue by themselves. Practice the dialogue in groups and act it out. Lead students to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. Practice 1. Let’s play. Take out the headdresses of some other characters in this book and introduce them. Play the cartoon. Try to know some other characters in this book. Watch the cartoon and read after it. Practice the dialogue by themselves. Wear the headdresses and role-play. Practice the key sentence structures. Activate the atmosphere. Motivate students' enthusiasm and stimulate their interest in learning. 2. Pass the flower. Practice the sentence structures by playing the game. Consolidation & Extension 1. Chain work. Work in groups and greet each other in a chain. Create a real situation to develop students' comprehensive language using ability. Stimulate students' interest in learning. 2. Dubbing show. Try to imitate and dub the cartoon characters. 3. Enjoy the song—Hello! Enjoy the song. Try to sing and dance with the teacher. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Sing the song Hello! to your family. 3. Do the exercises. The second period(第二课时) Part A Let’s learn & Let’s chant ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听、说、认读四个文具类单词“ruler, pencil, crayon, eraser” ·能够通过多种活动运用句型“I have a/an…”来表达自己拥有某物 Let’s chant ·能够在图片、动作和音频的帮助下理解并跟读歌谣 ·能够理解“Me too!”的意思并在实际情景中运用 ▶教学重点 能够理解和掌握本课重点单词“ruler, pencil, crayon, eraser”。 ▶教学难点 能够在情景中运用句型“I have a/an…”来表达自己拥有某物。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰、教学实物、图片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1 Greetings. 2 Sing and dance. T: Can you sing the song we learned last class? OK, let’s sing and dance together. （课件出示:教材 P10 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲） 3 Revision. The teacher asks some students to wear different headdresses and introduce themselves. The other students say “Hello/Hi, …” Teaching purpose 课前问好，拉近与学生 的距离。歌曲热身，活跃课 堂气氛。通过学生自我介绍 和相互问好，让学生复习上 节课所学的内容，巩固所学 知识，为授新做好铺垫。 1111 S1: Hello, I’m… Ss: Hi, … T: Before the class, I’ll divide you into four groups. Let’s make a competition! Try to get more stars! Step 2: Presentation 1. Learn the new words. (1) Teach the word “ruler”. The teacher takes out a pencil box. T: Look! I have a pencil box. What’s in my pencil box? Boys and girls, please guess. Ss: … T: You can come here. Close your eyes. Touch and guess. Who wants to try first? OK, you please. … T: OK, tell us. What do I have? S1: … T: Yes, I have a ruler! Thank you. Go back to your seat. Do you have a ruler? Ss: Yes! T: I have a ruler. You have a ruler, too. You can say “Me too!” Follow me, please. Ruler, ↗ ruler,↘ /u:/-/ ru:/, /ə (r)/, /lə (r)/, /'ru:lə (r)/, a ruler. I have a ruler.↘ Write down the sentence “I have a ruler.” and paste the picture of “ruler” on the blackboard. Let students take out their rulers and repeat the sentence “I have a ruler.” (2) Teach the word “pencil”. T: What else is in my pencil box? Let’s go on. Come here, touch and guess. Invite another student to the front. Let the student close his/her eyes, then touch and guess. T: Tell us, what do I have? S2: … T: Yes, I have a pencil! Do you have a pencil? Ss: Yes! T: Follow me. Pencil,↗ pencil,↘ /p/-/en/-/s/-/l/, /'pensl/, a pencil. I have a pencil. ↘ Teach the word “pencil” by the game “High and low voice”. Write down the word “pencil” and paste the picture on the blackboard. T: Show me your pencil! Students wave their pencils and say loudly, “Pencil,↗ pencil, ↘I have a pencil.↘” Teaching purpose 通过让学生摸一摸、猜 一猜铅笔盒里的物品以及玩 小游戏引出新授单词。展示 实物并以大小声、chant等形 式教学，增强趣味性，也更 利于学生理解和掌握，同时 做到词不离句，让学生初步 感知新句型“I have…”。。 (3) Teach the words “crayon” and “eraser”. Open the pencil box and take out the crayon and the eraser. Teach the words by the game “Drive a train”. Let students pay attention to the expression of “an eraser”. Strengthen the pronunciation of “crayon” and “eraser”. （游戏说明：可以开单列火车，学生按顺序读出单词；也可以同时开几 列火车，看哪列火车开得又快又好。） T: Show me your crayon/eraser! Students wave their crayons/erasers and say loudly, “Crayon, ↗ crayon, ↘ I have a crayon./Eraser, ↗ eraser, ↘I have an eraser. ↘” Write down the words “crayon, eraser” and paste the pictures on the blackboard. 2. Look and say. Let students look at the picture of “Let’s learn” carefully. Ask some questions to lead students to predict the main idea of the dialogue. 3. Listen, read and act. (1) Listen, number and answer. T: Boys and girls, listen to the recording and number the stationery in the picture. Then answer the questions. (课件出示：教材 P5 Let’s learn 板块的音频) T: Who are they? Ss: Zoom and Zip. T: What are they doing? Ss: … T: What can you see? Ss: A ruler, a pencil, a crayon, an eraser… T: What do they have? Ss: … T: Good! Zoom has a ruler. Zip has an eraser. (2) Read and act. Let students read after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Invite some students to be little teachers to lead other students to read. Let students practice the words and the sentences in groups. Then ask students to wear the headdresses of Zoom and Zip and role-play. Step 3: Practice Teaching purpose 学生听录音将文具图 片标上序号并回答问题，强 化学生对单词音与形的记 忆，同时检测学生对本部分 内容的理解。听录音跟读， 引导学生按照正确的语音、 语调朗读对话，并在小组中 进行角色扮演。 小老师带读的活动设 计抓住小学生乐于表现自 己的心理，可以极大地调动 学生的学习积极性。 Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观 察并讨论图片，借助图片预 测教学内容，培养学生的观 察能力和逻辑思维能力。 Teaching purpose 用游戏操练新单词和 句型，充分调动学生的多种 感官参与，既可以活跃课堂 氛围，又能够加强学生对新 单词和句型的记忆。 1313 1. Which one is missing? Show the words “ruler, pencil, crayon, eraser”on the PPT. （出 示课件） Let students read them loudly. Disorder them and hide one of them at a time. Ask students to say the missing words as fast as they can. 2. Play a game—Turn turn turn. Show a big turntable on the PPT. （出示课件） Ask a student to come to the front and turn the turntable. If the pointer points to the words about stationery, the student should practice the words with the sentence structure “I have a/an…” If the pointer points to “prize”, the student can get a prize. 3. I can say. Let students take out their stationery to the front and make an introduction. Give an example: Look! I have a ruler. I… Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Let’s chant. (1)Play the cartoon of “Let’s chant” for the first time. （课 件出示：教材 P5 Let’s chant 板块的视频） Let students take out the stationery they hear and put them in order on their desks. (2) Play the cartoon again. （出示课件） Let students read after the recording. (3) Let students practice the chant in groups. Ask students to chant together and show it to the class. 2. Quick response. T: Now, let’s play a game. When I say “I have a ruler!”, if you have a ruler, show me your ruler and say “Me too!” as fast as you can. OK? Ss: OK! T: I have a ruler! Ss: Me too! T: I have a/an… Ss: Me too! … T: Who wants to try? Invite some students to the front and say “I have a/an…” ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 让学生根据所听录音 内容拿出文具并按顺序摆 放在书桌上，培养学生的听 音能力。小组排练 chant并 集体展示，培养学生的合作 竞争意识。 Teaching purpose 通过游戏操练句型，避 免形式单一的朗读训练，充 分调动学生的多种感官。在 情景中教学，激发学生的学 习热情。 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the words and the sentences of “Let’s learn”. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作 业) ▶教学反思 1 单词教学的活动形式丰富，如：实物呈现、各种游戏操练、chant 巩固，并且在单词的教授过程中做到了 词不离句。 2 整个的教学流程比较清晰，教学设计合理，能较好地帮助学生掌握新知。 3 采用多种形式调动学生学习的积极性，营造良好的英语学习氛围。 4 板书设计精美直观，清晰明了，起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to listen, speak and read the new words “ruler, pencil, crayon, eraser”. · Be able to use the sentence structure “I have a/an…” properly to express the ownership of something. Let’s chant ·Be able to understand and sing the chant with the picture, the actions and the recording. ·Be able to understand the sentence “Me too!” and use it properly in real situations. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key words of this lesson. · Be able to use the sentence structure “I have a/an… ” to express the ownership of something. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structures “I have a/an…” “Me too!” skillfully in daily life. ▶Teaching Procedures 15 Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and dance. 3. Revision. Ask students to wear different headdresses and introduce themselves. Divide students into four groups. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and dance with the teacher. 3. Wear different headdresses and introduce themselves. Activate the atmosphere. Help students review the knowledge of last lesson and prepare for the new lesson. Presentation 1. Teach the new words “ruler, pencil, crayon, eraser” by objects and different games. Learn the new words by guessing the things in the pencil box, playing the games and chanting with the teacher. Let students touch and guess the things in the pencil box. Use the games to lead in the new words properly. Use different teaching methods to let students understand and master the words. And preliminarily perceive the new sentence structure “I have…” 2. Look and say. Show the picture of “Let’s learn” on the PPT and ask some questions. Look at the picture and answer some questions to predict the main idea of the dialogue. Cultivate students’ observation and logical thinking ability. 3. Listen, read and act. （1）Listen, number and answer. （2）Read and act. (1) Listen to the recording and number the stationery. Answer the questions. (2) Read after the recording. Pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Try to be little teachers to lead other students to read. Practice the dialogue in groups. Wear the headdresses of Zoom and Zip and role-play. Help students strengthen the memory of the words and understand the knowledge in this section better. Make sure that students read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Let students be the little teachers to arouse their enthusiasm for learning. （续表） Teaching Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Stages Practice 1. Which one is missing? Show the words on the PPT. Look at the words on the PPT and read them loudly. Then play the game: Try to say the missing words as fast as they can. Practice the key words and sentence structure by playing the games. Activate the atmosphere. Arouse students’ interest. 2. Play a game—Turn turn turn. Practice the words and the sentence structure by the game. 3. I can say. Let students take out their stationery to the front and make an introduction. Give an example. Take out the stationery to the front and make an introduction: Look! I have a/an… Consolidation & Extension 1. Let’s chant. Play the cartoon of “Let’s chant”. Watch the cartoon for the first time. Take out the stationery they hear and put them in order on their desks. Watch the cartoon again and read after the recording. Practice the chant in groups, then chant together and show it to the class. Train students’ listening skills. Cultivate students’ sense of cooperation and competition. Create a natural and real situation for students to use the sentence structures reasonably. 2. Quick response. Play the game: Show their school things and say “Me too!” as fast as they can according to what the teacher says. Homework 1. Practice the words and the sentences of “Let’s learn”. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. The third period(第三课时) Part A Let’s sing & Let’s find out ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 17 Let’s sing ·能够跟着录音说唱歌谣，初步感知 26 个字母的读音及其形式 ·能够按顺序说出 26 个字母 Let’s find out ·能够找出隐藏在图片中的字母 ▶教学重点 1. 能够初步感知 26 个字母的读音及其形式。 2. 能够按顺序说出 26 个字母。 ▶教学难点 能够按顺序说出 26 个字母。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、字母卡片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. Say hello to the class. T: Hello, I’m… S1: Hi, I’m… S2: Hi, I’m… … 2. Sing and dance—Hello!（出示课件） 3. Revision. T: Look! I have a ruler! Ss: Me too! Step 2: Presentation 1. Can you say? T: Boys and girls, we have 26 letters in English. What are they? Look at the screen, please. Show the 26 letters on the PPT. （出示课件）T: Can you read them? Ss: Yes! A, B, C, D… T: Great! OK! Follow me, please. A, A, A! Ss: A, A, A! … Teach the 26 letters one by one by using the letter cards. Let students clap their hands and read the letters. 2. Drive a train. T: Boys and girls, now let’s play a game. Teaching purpose 课前问候，歌曲热身， 营造良好的英语学习氛围， 使学生轻松愉快地进入角 色。复习旧知，巩固所学知 识。 Teaching purpose 通过课件呈现 26 个英 文字母，并用字母卡片教 授， 让学生初步感知 26 个 字母的读音及其形式。带领 学生打着拍子朗读 26 个字 母，让学生在节奏中加强对 26个字母的记忆。 Teaching purpose 用“开火车”的方式操 练 26 个字母，让学生在紧 张有趣的氛围中加深记忆， 调动学生的学习积极性和 学习热情。 Point to a student and say, “Now the train is coming! A! Go go go!” S1: B! S2: C! … (游戏说明:可从任意字母开始，让学生以“开火车”的方式接龙， 也可以“串糖葫芦”的方式，让学生说字母再任意指向其他学生。) 3. Sharp eyes. （1）Let students look at the 26 letters on the PPT. Lead students to read them one by one. （2）Play the game. Show the letters on the PPT one by one slowly and then show quickly. （出示课件） T: Now, let’s play a game. Look at the letters on the screen. If you know, you can stand up and say them loudly. Ready? Ss: Go! … 4. Let’s sing. （1）Play the song for the first time. （课件出示：教材 P6 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲） T: Now, let’s listen to the song. （2）Play the song again. (出示课件) T: Listen again, and this time please sing with the recording! （3）Play the song for the third time. (出示课件) T: This time, let’s clap our hands and sing together. Students clap their hands and sing with the teacher. （4）Ask students to sing in groups. T: Now practice the song in groups, please. We’ll make a competition among the four groups. Five minutes for you! Give the prize to the best group. Step 3: Practice 1. I can fill. 2. I can match. Teaching purpose 借助课件让学生进一 步熟知 26 个字母的大小写 形式，完成填空和配对练 习，进而加强对 26 个字母 顺序的记忆。 Teaching purpose “眼疾口快”的游戏教 学可以调动学生多种感官 的参与;活动面向全体学生， 可参与性强，丰富课堂。 Teaching purpose 打着拍子学唱歌曲，并 以小组 PK的方式在班级展 示，培养学生的合作竞争意 识,调动学生的积极性，极大 地鼓舞学生，增强其自信 心。 19 Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Look and find. Show some pictures of daily life on the PPT. (课件出示：日常生活中 隐藏着字母的图片) Let students look at the pictures carefully. T: What letters can you find? Ss: … 2. Let’s find out. （1）Show the picture of “Let’s find out” on the PPT. （课件出示： 教材 P6 Let’s find out 板块的图片） T: The letters are playing games with us. Look! (Point to the door.) What’s this? Ss: … T: Yes, it’s a door. And does it look like a letter? Ss: Yes! T: Which letter? Ss: “n”. T: Great! The letters are hiding in the picture. Can you find them? Please circle the letters you find. （2）Check the answers on the PPT. （课件出示：教材 P6 Let’s find out 板块的答案） 3. Let’s draw. Let students draw a picture with some hidden letters, then share it with the class. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 选取生活中的图片，引 导学生寻找隐藏的字母，为 后面的活动做铺垫,同时培 养学生的观察能力。让学生 自主创作一幅隐藏着字母 的图画，既能加强学生对字 母形的记忆，又有利于开拓 其发散性思维。 ▶作业设计 1. Sing the ABC song to your family. 2. Do the exercises. (见 “状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》P47 第四题) ▶教学反思 1. 充分利用网络资源服务课堂教学，利用生动形象的图片辅助教学，激发学生的学习兴趣，调动学生的学 习积极性。 2. 游戏形式多样，充满趣味性并且面向全体学生，较好地兼顾了不同层次的学生。 3. 设计开放性的练习，让学生自主创作含有隐藏字母的图片，培养学生的发散性思维。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s sing · Be able to sing the ABC song and perceive the pronunciation and the form of the 26 letters. · Be able to say the 26 letters in order. Let’s find out · Be able to find out the hidden letters from the picture. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to perceive the pronunciation and the form of the 26 letters. ·Be able to say the 26 letters in order. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to say the 26 letters in order. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. Say hello to the class. 2. Sing and dance—Hello! 3. Revision. 1. Try to say hello to the teacher. 2. Sing and dance. 3. Review the words and the sentence structures. Create a good English learning atmosphere. Cultivate students’ interest in learning. Help students review the knowledge of last lesson. Presentation 1. Can you say? Show the 26 letters on the PPT. Teach the letters by the Look at the 26 letters on the PPT. Try to read the letters by themselves and Let students perceive the pronunciation and the form of the 26 21 letter cards. read after the teacher. Learn the letters by the letter cards. Clap their hands and read the letters. letters. Strengthen the memory of the 26 letters in the beat. 2. Drive a train. Play the game “Drive a train”. Say the letters one by one in order. Cultivate students’ interest in learning. Help students deepen their memory in a tense and interesting atmosphere. 3. Sharp eyes. Show the letters on the PPT. Let students read them one by one. Then play the game. Look at the letters and read them one by one. Then play the game: Look at the letters on the screen, then stand up and say them loudly. Activate the atmosphere. Mobilize the participation of students’ multiple senses. Strengthen the memory of the letters. 4. Let’s sing. （1）Play the song—ABC song. （2）Play the song again. Let students sing with the recording. （3）Play the song. Let students clap their hands and sing with the teacher. （4）Let students practice the song in groups, and then make a competition. (1) Listen to the song for the first time. (2) Listen again and try to sing with the recording. (3) Clap hands and sing with the teacher. (4) Practice the song in groups. Make a competition among the four groups. Cultivate students’ sense of cooperation and competition. Enhance students’ confidence. Practice 1. I can fill. Look at the screen and fill in the blanks. Let students fill in the blanks and finish the matching task to strengthen the memory of the 26 letters. 2. I can match Look at the letters on the PPT. Match the letters. Consolidation & Extension 1. Look and find. Look at the pictures on the PPT carefully. Try to find the letters. Strengthen the 26 letters. Develop students’ observation ability. Cultivate students’ divergent thinking. 2. Let’s find out. Look at the picture and try to find the hidden letters. Then check the answers. 3. Let’s draw. Draw a picture with some hidden letters, then share it with the class. Homework 1. Sing the ABC song to your family. 2. Do the exercises. The fourth period(第四课时) Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够按照正确的语音、语调及意群朗读对话，并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够听懂、会说核心句型“—What’s your name? —My name’s…”“Goodbye./Bye.” ·能够在情景中运用句型“—What’s your name? —My name’s…”询问对方的姓名并作 答 ·能够用“Goodbye./Bye.”与人道别 Let’s play ·能够在情景中运用句型“—What’s your name? —My name’s…”进行问答游戏 ▶教学重点 1. 能够在情景中运用句型“—What’s your name? —My name’s…”询问对方的姓名并作答。 2. 能够用“Goodbye./Bye.”与人道别。 ▶教学难点 能够在日常生活中自然地运用本课核心句型进行交际。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰、面具等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—ABC song. （课件出示：教材 P6 Let’s sing 板块的 歌曲） Let students clap their hands and sing the song together. 3. Revision. T: Do you have an English name? Can you introduce yourself? Who wants to try first? Invite some students to the front to introduce themselves by using “Hello/ Hi, I’m…” Teaching purpose 通过唱歌活跃课堂氛 围，进入课前准备。让学生 做自我介绍，既复习旧知， 又为新知的学习做好铺垫。 23 Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the sentence structure “My name’s…” The teacher takes out different headdresses and wears the headdress of Chen Jie, then greets the class, “Hello, I’m Chen Jie. I can also say that my name’s Chen Jie.” The teacher wears the headdress of Mike and says, “Hello, my name’s Mike.” The teacher wears the headdress of John and says, “Hello, my name’s John. What’s your name?” Teach the sentence structure “My name’s…” several times and lead students to answer the question by using “My name’s…” 2. Look and say. Show the pictures of “Let’s talk” on the PPT. （课件出示：教 材 P7 Let’s talk 板块的图片）Let students look at the pictures carefully. Ask some questions to lead them to predict the main idea of the dialogue. 3. Watch, answer and act. （1）Play the cartoon about Picture 1.（出示课件）Let students watch the cartoon with a question: What are their names? T: One boy is Mike, and the other is John. If you want to know somebody’s name, you can ask, “What’s your name?” He/ She can answer, “My name’s…” Write down the sentence structures “—What’s your name? —My name’s…” on the blackboard. Let students read after the cartoon. Invite some students to be little teachers to lead other students to read. Then ask students to play the game “Whisper”. Let two lines of students pass on the two sentences one by one in a low voice. ①What’s your name? ②My name’s… Choose the best line. （2）Play the cartoon about Picture 2.（出示课件）Let students watch and answer the following questions: ①Who are they? ②What does the woman say to the boys? ③What do the boys say to the woman? S1: They are Mike, John and Miss White. S2: Miss White says, “Goodbye!” S3: The boys say, “Bye, Miss White.” Help students understand “Goodbye. / Bye.” by body language. Then say Teaching purpose 通过戴头饰做自我介 绍，引出本课核心句型，让 学生了解可以用不同的方 式介绍自己。自然引入新 知，使学生易于理解和掌 握，为后面的学习做好铺 垫。 Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观 察并讨论图片，借助图片预 测教学内容，培养学生的观 察能力。 Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读，引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读对话，并能 在小组中进行角色扮演。 Teaching purpose 帮助学生全面感知文 本，获取有用信息。小老师 带读的活动设计可让学生 体会到英语学习带来的自 豪感和成就感。“传话”小 游戏既可以增强学生的合 作和竞争意识，又可以帮助 学生加深对句型的记忆。 “Goodbye.” to different students. T: Goodbye, S1. S1: Bye, … … （3）Ask students to read after the whole cartoon and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Let them practice the dialogue in groups and role-play. Then choose some students to show in class. Step 3: Practice 1. I can fill. Check the answers together. 2. Role-play. Create a situation by the PPT. Let students wear the headdresses and role-play. 3. Let’s play. Let each student write down his/her English name on a piece of paper. Provide an English name for the student who doesn’t have an English name. Then put all the paper into a box. Ask a student to pick one from the box. Ss: What’s your name? S1: My name’s… S2: Oh! That’s my name! … Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Welcome to our party!” T: Now, let’s begin our costume party. Boys and girls, please take out your masks. You can go and get to know each other. Teaching purpose 文本再构，帮助学生进 一步熟悉和理解对话内容。 利用课件创设一定的情景， 让学生分角色表演并操练 对话，便于学生掌握核心句 型。 Teaching purpose 举办化装舞会，使学生 在自由真实、轻松愉快的情 景中用所学知识自然地进 行交际，加深对句型的理解 和运用。创设情境教学，培 养学生的综合语言运用能 力。最后师生道别，让学生 在 语 境 中 理 解 及 运 用 Teaching purpose 学生寻找自己名字的 游戏可以活跃课堂气氛，调 动学生的学习积极性，激发 学生的学习兴趣。 25 Let students wear the masks and greet each other by using the sentence structures “—What’s your name? — My name’s…” T: How many friends do you make? Who are they? S1: … S2: … … T: OK! Class is over. Let’s say goodbye to your friends. Ss: Goodbye/ Bye, … ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Recite the text. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作 业) ▶教学反思 1. 教学目标明确，教学重难点把握准确，整个教学过程重点突出。 2. 注重创设情境教学，充分利用多媒体资源优势，让学生在情景中自然地进行对话交际。 3. 充分发挥教师的引导作用，引导学生理解和运用所学知识。 4. 活动设计符合小学生的心理特点和生理特点,极大地激发了学生的学习热情，尊重学生的主体地位，让 学生在活动、操练、合作中逐步掌握重难点知识。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the pictures. · Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. · Be able to understand and read the key sentence structures “—What’s your name? —My name’s…” and “Goodbye./Bye.” · Be able to use the key sentence structures properly in situations. Let’s play · Be able to use the key sentence structures properly in situations. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to use the sentence structures “—What’s your name? —My name’s…” in situations. ·Be able to say goodbye to other people by using “Goodbye./Bye.” ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to apply the key sentence structures of this lesson to real situations. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—ABC song. 3. Revision. Invite some students to introduce themselves by using “Hello/Hi, I’m…” 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—ABC song. 3. Introduce themselves by using “Hello/Hi, I’m…” Stimulate students’ interest in learning. Help students review the knowledge of last lesson and prepare for the new lesson. Presentation 1. Teach the sentence structure “My name’s…” Wear different headdresses to teach the sentence structure “My name’s…” and lead students to answer the question “What’s your name?” by using “My name’s…” Learn the sentence structure “My name’s…” Try to answer the question by using “My name’s…” Lead in the key sentence structure properly by wearing different headdresses. Help students understand and master the new knowledge. Prepare for the next step. 2. Look and say. Show the pictures of “Let’s talk” on the PPT and ask some questions to lead students to predict the main idea of the dialogue. Look at the pictures and predict the main idea of the dialogue by the questions. Lead students to observe and talk about the pictures to predict the main idea. Cultivate students’ observation ability. 3. Watch, answer and act. (1) Play the cartoon about Picture 1. Help students understand the dialogue. Teach the sentence structures “—What’s your name? —My name’s…” Invite some students to be little teachers to lead other students to read. Then ask students to play the game “Whisper”. Choose the best line. (2) Play the cartoon about Picture 2. Help students understand “Goodbye. / Bye.” by body language. (3) Let students read and act. （1）Watch the cartoon and try to understand the dialogue. Read after the cartoon and learn the sentence structures. Try to be little teachers and play the game. （2）Watch the cartoon and try to understand “Goodbye./Bye.” （3）Read after the whole cartoon. Practice the dialogue in groups and role-play. Then show in class. Help students get an overall perception of the text and the useful information. Motivate students’ interest in learning English and let them feel the sense of pride and achievement. Strengthen the memory of the sentence structures. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. 27 Practice 1. I can fill. Check the answers. Fill in the blanks. Check the answers with the teacher. Help students practice the key sentence structures. Activate the atmosphere. 2. Role-play. Create a situation by the PPT. Wear the headdresses and role-play. 3. Let’s play. Let each student write down his/her English name on a piece of paper. Then put all the paper into a box. Each student writes down his/her English name on a piece of paper. Try to find their own names from the box. Consolidation & Extension “Welcome to our party!” Let students wear the masks and greet each other by using the key sentence structures. Wear the masks and greet each other by using the key sentence structures. Create a natural and real situation to develop students’ comprehensive language using ability. Cultivate students’ interest in learning. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Recite the text. 3. Do the exercises. The fifth period(第五课时) Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s learn 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够听、说、认读四个新词汇“bag, pencil box, pen, book” Let’s do ·能够理解 Let’s do 板块句子的意思，并能够按照指令做动作 ·能够养成良好的行为习惯，爱惜自己的文具 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、认读四个新词汇“bag, pencil box, pen, book”。 ▶教学难点 能够理解 Let’s do 板块句子的意思，并能够按照指令做动作。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、教学实物、图片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in Teaching purpose 通过唱歌、复习日常问 候交际用语，活跃课堂气氛。 同时帮助学生复习并巩固自 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and dance—Hello!（出示课件） 3. Revision. Let students sing the chant on page 5. （出示课件） Then ask students to make a dialogue by using the following sentences. Divide students into four groups: Bag, Pencil box, Pen, Book. Let them make a competition. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the word “bag”. The teacher takes out a bag and points to it. T: Look! I have a bag! Do you have a bag? Ss: Yes! Teach the word “bag” by the game “High and low voice”. T: I have a bag. /b/-/ æ /-/g/, /bæg/. My bag! Point to a student’s bag and say, “Your bag!” Lead students to clap hands and chant: Bag, ↗ bag,↘ my bag,↗ your bag.↘ Write down the word “bag” on the blackboard. 2. Teach the phrase “pencil box”. T: Boys and girls, what’s in my bag? Please guess. S1: … Take out a pencil box from the bag. T: Wow! It’s a pencil box! Do you have a pencil box? Ss: Yes! T: I have a pencil box. /pen/-/sl/, /'pensl/, /b/-/ɒ/-/ks/, /bɒks/, /'pensl bɒks/. My pencil box! Teach the phrase “pencil box” by the game “Opposite tune”. Then lead students to clap hands and chant: Pencil box, ↗ pencil box, ↘ my pencil box,↗ your pencil box. ↘ Write down “pencil box” on the blackboard. 3. Teach the word “pen”. Open the pencil box. T: Look! What’s this? Ss: … T: Great! It’s a pen. /p/, /e/, /n/, /pen/. Teach the word by passing the pen. Lead students to clap hands and chant: Pen, ↗ pen,↘ my pen, ↗ your pen. ↘ Write down the word “pen” on the blackboard. 4. Teach the word “book”. Wave the English book and ask, “What’s this?” Ss: … Teaching purpose 实物教学，并结合“大 小声”和“唱反调”的方式 教授新单词、短语，极大地 激发学生的学习兴趣，活跃 课堂氛围，寓教于乐。自然 地引出“Your…”这一表达, 词不离句，帮助学生在语境 中理解其含义。 Teaching purpose 实物教学，给学生最直 观的感受。多种形式操练， 增强趣味性。让学生打着节 拍一起 chant，同时操练单词 和句型，在有节奏、有韵律 的说唱中加深对核心词汇的 记忆。 29 T: Bingo! It’s a book. /b/-/ʊ/-/k/, /bʊk/. Teach the word by the game “Jump and say”. (活动说明:教师将书放在学生头顶上方，让学生跳跃并用头碰书，同时 大声朗读单词。) Lead students to clap hands and chant: Book,↗ book,↘ my book, ↗ your book.↘ Write down the word “book” on the blackboard. 5. Learn the new word “bridge”. Play the video. （课件出示：教材 P8 Let’s learn 板块的视频） Let students talk about what they see and number the school things according to the video. Teach“no”several times. Then let students read the dialogue after the recording. T: How careless Zoom is! Class, we should be careful and cherish our school things. Step 3: Practice 1. Do a matching task. Disorder the word cards and the pictures on the blackboard. Let students do the matching task. （活动说明：教师将黑板上的单词卡片和图片顺序打乱，再请同学完成 配对练习，奖励完成得好的同学。） 2. Choose the cards. Let students choose the cards of “pencil box, book, pen, bag, King, Queen”. If they choose “King” or “Queen”, they can get a prize. If they choose other words or phrase, they have to read them three times. 3. Up and down. Let some students take out their stationery to the front, such as a pencil box, a pen, a pencil, a bag, a ruler and so on. Give an example: Bag down, bag down, bag down then book down. The last student will be the winner and he/she can get a prize. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let’s do. （1）I say, you do. ①Play the cartoon for the first time. （课件出示：教材 P8 Let’s do 板块的视频） Teach the words “open, show, close, carry” by body language. Then lead students to do the actions after the video. ②T: Now, I say, you do. Open your book… Ask students to do the actions according to the instructions. ③Let students practice the sentences in groups and then read aloud to the class. （2）I do, you say. ①T: Now, let’s play the game “I do, you say”. Ask students to say the sentences according to the actions. Teaching purpose 适时渗透情感价值观的 教育，引导学生要细心和爱 惜自己的学习用品。 Teaching purpose 先让学生完成形义配对 练习，再通过抽卡片和“萝 卜蹲”的游戏来巩固操练单 词及短语，丰富活动形式， 且层层递进，有效训练不同 层次的学生，让学生在轻松 愉悦的氛围中掌握新知。 Teaching purpose 通过肢体语言让学生理 解和掌握四个动词的含义。 让学生根据指令做动作及根 据动作说出指令性用语，充 分调动学生多种感官的参 与。通过游戏创设真实、自 然的情境，让学生在愉快的 氛围中练习词汇和指令性用 语。 ②Let students practice the sentences in groups. Ask them to imitate the game and show it to the class. Give the prize to the best group. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Read the words and the phrase. 2. Practice the sentences of “Let’s do” with your partners. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作 业) ▶教学反思 1. 各种丰富的游戏贯穿于教学的始终，如“大小声”“唱反调”“抽卡片”“萝卜蹲”“我说你做”等，既 活跃了课堂气氛，又充分调动了学生的学习积极性。 2. 整个教学过程环环相扣，层层递进，让不同层次的学生都能得到较好的训练。 3. 评价机制的设定有利于培养学生的合作和竞争意识，激发学生的学习热情。 4. 抓住课堂契机，适时渗透情感价值观的教育，体现了以学生为本的教学理念。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn ·Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue with the help of the picture and the teacher. ·Be able to listen, speak and read the new words and phrase “bag, pencil box, pen, book”. Write and say · Be able to understand the sentences and do the actions according to the instructions. · Be able to form good behavior habits and cherish stationery. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the new words and phrase “bag, pencil box, pen, book”. ▶Teaching Difficulties 31 ·Be able to understand the sentences and do the actions according to the instructions. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and dance—Hello! 3. Revision. Let students sing the chant. Ask students to make a dialogue. Divide students into four groups and ask them to compete. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and dance with the teacher. 3. Sing the chant on page 5. Then make a dialogue. Make a competition among groups. Through greetings and the song, activate the atmosphere. Help students review the knowledge of last lesson and prepare for the new lesson. Cultivate students’ interest in learning through the group competition. Presentation 1. Teach the word “bag”. Take out a bag and lead in the word. Teach the word “bag” by the game “High and low voice”. Lead students to clap hands and chant. Learn the word “bag” by the game “High and low voice”. Clap hands and chant with the teacher. Teach the new words and phrase through the real objects and the games. Help students practice them by different activities. Cultivate students’ interest in learning. Elevate students’ learning initiative. And lead in the new sentence structure “Your…” properly. 2. Teach the phrase “pencil box”. Let students guess what’s in the bag. Teach the phrase “pencil box” by the game “Opposite tune”. Lead students to clap hands and chant. Guess what’s in the teacher’s bag. Learn the phrase “pencil box” by the game “Opposite tune”. Clap hands and chant with the teacher. 3. Teach the word “pen”. Open the pencil box and say, “Look! What’s this?” Teach the word by passing the pen. Lead students to clap hands and chant. Learn the word “pen” by passing the pen. Clap hands and chant with the teacher. 4. Teach the word “book”. Wave the English book and ask, “What’s this?” Teach the word by the game “Jump and say”. Lead students to clap hands and chant. Answer what’s in the teacher’s hand. Learn the word “book” by the game “Jump and say”. Clap hands and chant with the teacher. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 5. Teach the dialogue. Play the video. Let students talk about what they see and number the school things. Teach “no” several times. Let students read the dialogue after the recording. Watch the video. Talk about what they can see. Number the school things. Learn “no”. Read the dialogue after the recording. Infiltrate emotional values. Remind students to be careful and cherish their school things. Practice 1. Do a matching task. Disorder the word cards and the pictures on the blackboard. Do the matching task. Help students practice the words and the phrase. Activate the atmosphere. 2. Choose the cards. Play the game. Choose the word cards and read the words and the phrase. 3. Up and down. Take out their stationery to do the game “Up and down”. Consolidation & Extension Let’s do. (1) I say, you do. Teach the words. Let students do the actions according to the instructions. (2)I do, you say. Let students say the sentences according to the actions. (1) Try to do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions. Practice the sentences in groups and read aloud to the class. (2) Try to say the sentences according to the teacher’s actions. Help students understand the meanings of the four verbs by body language. Create a natural and real situation to help students use the sentences reasonably. Homework 1. Read the words and the phrase. 2. Practice the sentences of “Let’s do” with your partners. 3. Do the exercises. The sixth period(第六课时) Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing 33 ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Start to read ·能够识别、认读 26 个字母，完成圈出相同字母的练习 ·能够听、说、认读本单元所学词汇，正确数出相同词汇的数量 Let’s check ·能够观察图片，根据图片信息预测听力考查点，并有意识地去听录音排序 ·能够观察图片，朗读词汇，并完成配对练习 Let’s sing ·能够听懂、跟唱歌曲，并能创编新的歌曲 ▶教学重点 1. 能够识别、认读 26 个字母。 2. 复习本单元与学习用品有关的词汇，并做到能听懂、会说、认读这些词汇。 ▶教学难点 能够识别、认读 26 个字母，并独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、字母卡片、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2.Sing a song—ABC song. （出示课件）. Let students clap hands and sing the song together. 3. Revision. Ask students to introduce themselves by filling in the blanks according to the pictures. Review the sentence structures above by having a free talk between the teacher and students. Step 2: Presentation 1. Circle the same letters. (1) Take out the letter cards, disorder them and let students read one by one. Let students recite the 26 letters in order. (2) Invite some students to read the letters in the book. Teaching purpose 通过唱歌复习 26 个字 母，营造英语学习氛围。帮 助学生复习询问他人姓名和 自我介绍的句型，巩固旧知。 Teaching purpose 注重对学生的学习方 法进行指导，同时培养学生 的观察能力。 (3) Let students circle the same letters. Ask students to count the same letters. Check the answers on the PPT. (课件出示：教材 P9 Circle the same letters 的答案) 2. Whack-mole. Let students play the game to practice the words and the phrase “pen, pencil, pencil box, eraser, ruler, book, bag, crayon”. (游戏说明：用课件制作一个打地鼠的游戏，地鼠们举着词汇卡：pen, pencil, pencil box, eraser, ruler, book, bag, crayon。地鼠举起词汇 卡的时候学生读词汇，教师用鼠标控制小锤子锤词汇，地鼠进洞。) 3. Read and count. (1) Let students look at the words and phrase on the leaves and then read them one by one. (2) Let students mark the same words and phrase in the same way and then count them. For example, they can underline “pencil” when they see “pencil” and they can circle “pen” when they see “pen”. Check the answers on the PPT. （课件出示：教材 P9 Read and count 的答案） Step 3: Practice 1. Whisper. Divide students into several groups. Let them pass on different sentences in a low voice one by one. Let the last student in each group share the sentence with the class. The best group will get a prize. Sentences are like these:  What’s your name?  My name’s Mike.  Hello, I’m Sarah.  Goodbye, Miss White. … 2. Listen and number. (1) Let students look at the four pictures carefully and predict the listening contents. (2) Remind students to listen to the key words. Play the recording. （课件出示：教材 P10 Listen and number 的音频） Let students listen to it and try to number the pictures. Check the answers on the PPT. (课 件出示：教材 P10 Listen and number 的答案) （3）Play the recording again. (出示课件) Let students read after the recording. 3. Look and match. (1) Let students cover the words and the phrase and say them according to the pictures. (2) Let students read the words and the phrase one by one, and then match them to the pictures. Check the answers on the PPT. (课件出示： 教材 P10 Look and match 的答案) Teaching purpose 通过游戏，复习并操练 本单元关于学习用品的词 汇，激发学生的学习兴趣， 并有效活跃课堂气氛，为后 面的复习做好铺垫。 Teaching purpose 引导学生先朗读词汇， 再用画线、画圈等方式标记 相同的词汇，边读边数，对 学生的学习方法进行有效 的指导，加深学生对词汇的 识读和记忆。 Teaching purpose 让学生在紧张有趣的 游戏中操练句型，避免形式 单一的跟读。听前预留时间 让学生对听力内容进行预 测，培养学生的听力技巧。 做配对练习前让学生根据 图片说词汇，最后义、形配 对，培养学生的学习方法。 Teaching purpose 检测学生的归纳总结 能力，培养学生的发散性思 维。 Teaching purpose 创设情境，帮助学生更 好地理解歌曲。然后让学生 自主创编新歌，培养学生的 发散性思维，增强学生的创 35 Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let’s sing! （1）Play the song for the first time. （课件出示：教材 P10 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲） Let students listen to it carefully. T: How many names can you hear? Who are they? Ss: … （2）Play the song again. （出示课件） Lead students to clap hands and sing with the recording. Let them practice in groups. Invite some students to wear the headdresses, and the others sing the song and greet them. （3）Make a new song. Let students try to make a new song with their friends’ names. Make a model: Hello, Dora! Do, oh, do. Hello, Jackson! Do, oh, do. Hello, Jay! Do, oh, do. Hello! Hello! Hello! ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Read the words and the phrase. 2. Sing the song Hello! to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见 “状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作 业) ▶教学反思 1. 在进行听力活动和练习之前，预留时间让学生观察和思考，突出学生学习的主体地位，充分发挥教师 的引导作用，尽可能地给学生足够的时间和空间，培养他们的自主学习能力。 2. 打地鼠、传话游戏等活动设计符合小学生心理特点和生理特点，营造良好的学习氛围，增强学生学习 的主动性。 3. 注重对学生学习方法的指导，如对学生读的指导、听的指导、做的指导。 4. 实施单元整体教学，能较好地实现单元教学目标，能够对本单元的重点词汇和句型进行准确的复习和 巩固。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Start to read ·Be able to recognize and read the 26 letters, and complete the exercise “Circle the same letters”. · Be able to listen, speak and read the vocabulary of this unit and count the same vocabulary. Let’s check ·Be able to predict the examination points according to the pictures, and listen and number the pictures purposefully. ·Be able to observe the pictures, read the vocabulary and complete the matching exercise. Let’s sing ·Be able to understand and sing the song, and make a new song. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to recognize and read the 26 letters. ·Review the words and the phrase about school things of this unit and be able to listen, speak and read them. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to recognize and read the 26 letters, and finish the exercises of “Let’s check” independently. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—ABC song. 3. Revision. Lead students to review the words and the sentence structures by filling in the blanks and having a free talk. 1. Try to say hello to the teacher. 2. Clap hands and sing the song together. 3. Fill in the blanks to introduce themselves. Talk with the teacher. Use the song to create a good English learning atmosphere. Help students review the words and the sentence structures. Presentation 1. Circle the same letters. (1) Take out the letter cards, disorder them and let students read one by one. Let students recite the 26 letters in order. (2) Invite some students to read the letters in the book. (3) Let students circle the same letters. Ask students to count the same letters. Check the answers on the PPT. Read the letters on the cards. Try to recite the 26 letters in order. Read the letters in the book. Circle the same letters. Count the same letters. Check the answers with the teacher. Help students review the 26 letters. Cultivate students’ observation ability. 2. Whack-a-mole. Let students play the game. Play the game to practice the words and the phrase “pen, pencil, pencil box, eraser, ruler, book, bag, Lead students to practice the key words and phrase. Stimulate students’ interest in learning. 37 crayon”. Activate the atmosphere. Prepare for the following study. 3. Read and count. Let students look at the words and the phrase on the leaves and then read them one by one. Let students mark the same words and phrase in the same way and then count them. Look at the words and the phrase on the leaves and read them one by one. Mark the same words and phrase in the same way and then count them. Strengthen the words and the phrase. Cultivate students’ learning methods. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Whisper. Divide students into several groups. Let them pass on different sentences in a low voice. Give a prize to the best group. Try to pass on different sentences in a low voice. The last student in each group shares the sentence with the class. Lead students to practice the key words, phrase and sentence structures. Develop their listening skills. Cultivate their learning methods. 2. Listen and number. Let students look at the four pictures carefully and predict the listening contents. Play the recording. Check the answers. Look at the four pictures carefully and predict the contents. Listen to the recording and number the pictures. Check the answers. Read after the recording. 3. Look and match. Let students cover the words and the phrase. Then say the words and the phrase according to the pictures. Let students read and match. Cover the words and the phrase. Then say the words and the phrase according to the pictures. Read and match. Consolidation & Extension Let’s sing! Play the song. Lead students to understand and learn the song. Let students make a new song. Listen to the song, clap hands and sing with the recording. Practice in groups. Try to make a new song. Create a natural and real situation to help students understand and learn the song. Cultivate students’ divergent thinking. Enhance students’ confidence. Homework 1. Read the words and the phrase. 2. Sing the song Hello! to your family. 3. Do the exercises. Unit 2 Colours 教材分析 本单元学习的主题是颜色和介绍、问候他人。教学内容主要是围绕 Miss White 等人见面打 招呼并相互认识和 Wu Yifan 到 Mike 家做客的场景来展开的。教学重点是能够听懂、会说核心 句型“Good morning.”“Good afternoon.”“This is…”“Nice to meet you.”；能够听、说、 认读单词“red, green, yellow, blue, black, brown, white, orange”。 教学目标 知识与能力目标: 句型 ·能听懂、会说句型“Good morning.”“Good afternoon.”“This is…”“Nice to meet you.” 词汇 ·能听、说、认读单词“red, green, yellow, blue, black, brown, white, orange” 字母与语音 ·能正确听、说、读、写字母 Aa， Bb， Cc， Dd 并知道其在单词中的发音 能力目标： ·能够在情境中运用句型“Good morning.”和“Good afternoon.”向别人表达问候并回应别 人的问候 ·能够在情境中运用句型“This is…”介绍他人 ·能够在情境中运用句型“Nice to meet you.”表达初次相识或被人介绍而相识时相互间的问 候 ·听到字母能说出它对应的发音 情感态度、文化意识、学习策略目标： ·学会问候他人，向他人介绍朋友 ·了解彩虹的颜色组成 ·能够建立单词音、义、形之间的联系，整体学习单词 39 课时安排 第一课时: Part A Let's talk & Draw and say 第二课时: Part A Let's learn & Let's do 第三课时: Part A Letters and sounds 第四课时: Part B Let's talk & Let's play 第五课时: Part B Let's learn & Let's do 第六课时: Part B Start to read & Let's check & Let's sing The first period(第一课时) Part A Let’s talk & Draw and say ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够理解对话大意，并能用正确的语音、语调朗读对话 ·能够在语境中运用“Good morning.”向他人表达问候 ·能够在语境中运用句型“This is…”介绍他人并能正确使用“Miss， Mr”称呼他人 Draw and say ·能够运用句型 “This is…”介绍自己画的教师肖像画并能正确使用“Miss， Mr”称呼 他人 ▶教学重点 能够理解和掌握本课时的核心句型“Good morning.”“This is…”。 ▶教学难点 1. 能够在实际情景中正确运用句型“This is…”介绍他人。 2. 能够正确使用“Miss, Mr”称呼他人，并能区分它们的读音。 ▶教学准备 1. 预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hello, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Mrs/ Mr… T: Hi, boy! What's your name? S1: My name is… T: Hello, girl! What's your name? S2: I'm… 2. Revision. Let students ask and answer one by one: S1: Hello! I'm… What's your name? S2: Hello! I'm… What's your name? S3: Hello! I'm… What's your name? … 3. Lead-in. Show the pictures of Miss Green and Mr Jones. Let students guess who they are. Teaching purpose 在热身环节，通过师生 间的对话和接龙游戏 ,营造 轻松的学习氛围，同时复习 并巩固上一单元的重点句 型。 在导入环节，通过展示 格林小姐和琼斯先生的图片 来引出新课的主人翁，学习 正确使用“Miss”和“Mr” 来称呼他人，进而导入新课。 41 T: Look at the pictures. Who is she? Yes, she's Miss Green. /mɪs/, /gri:n/. And who is he? He's Mr Jones. / 'mɪstə (r)/, /dʒəʊnz/. They are teachers, too. The woman teacher is Miss Green. And the name of the man teacher is Jones. Can we call him Miss Jones? Ss: No. T: Yes. We should call him Mr Jones. Show some photos of different adults on the PPT. (出示课件) Let students choose “Miss” or “Mr” for these people. T: Now let's say hello to Miss Green. OK? Ss: OK! Hello! Miss Green. T: Now, please say hi to Mr Jones. Ss: Hi! Mr Jones. Step 2: Presentation 1. Learn the new sentences. (1) Show a picture of the rising sun on the PPT. (出示课件) T: Look at the picture. When is it? In the morning or in the afternoon? And how do you know that? Ss: … T: Yes. We can see the rising sun. It's morning now! Teach students the pronunciation and the meaning of “morning”. Let students follow the teacher to read and practice it several times. T: Good morning, boys and girls! Good, /g/ /ʊ/ /d/, /gʊd/. Morning, /m/-/ɔ:/ /nɪŋ /, / 'mɔ:nɪŋ/. Good morning. You can answer like this: Good morning, Miss/Mr… Ss: Good morning, Miss/Mr… Write down the sentence “Good morning.” on the blackboard. T: Boys, say “Good morning.” to all the girls! Bs: Good morning, girls! T: Now! Girls, say “Good morning.” to the boys. Gs: Good morning, boys! (2) Create a real situation to teach the sentence structure “This is…” Let two students wear the headdresses of Miss Green and Mr Jones. T: Look! This is Miss Green! This, /ð/-/ ɪ/-/s/, /ðɪs/. You can introduce this woman teacher like this: This is Miss Green. Teaching purpose 通过创设真实的情景， 让学生听懂并会说句型 “Good morning.”和“This is…”，并在师生、生生间充 分地操练，让学生在情景中 学会运用。 Write down the sentence structure “This is Miss…” on the blackboard. T: Let's say “Good morning.” to Miss Green. Ss: Good morning, Miss Green! T: (Point to the student who wears the headdress of Mr Jones.) This is… Ss: This is Mr Jones. Write down the sentence structure “This is Mr…” on the blackboard. T: Say “Good morning.” to Mr Jones. Ss: Good morning, Mr Jones! T: You are great! (Point to S1.) Look, this is… Ss: This is S1. T: Good morning, S1. (Point to S2.) This is… Ss: This is S2. T: Good morning, S2. … (3) Let students use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce their classmates in groups. For example: S1: Good morning. I'm S1. This is S2. S2: Good morning. I'm S2. This is S3. S3: Good morning. I'm S3. This is S4. S4: Good morning. I'm S4. This is S1. 2. Look and guess. Show the picture of Miss White in “Let's talk”. T: Who is she? Ss: Miss White. T: Who is she talking to? Can you guess? S1: Wu Yifan. S2: Mr Jones. S3: Miss Green. … T: Good guess! 3. Listen and answer. (1)Play the recording of “Let's talk”. （课件出示：教材 P14 Let's talk 板块的音频） Let students listen to the recording and finish the task. Teaching purpose 任务型教学法可有效 集中学生的注意力。同时， 学生通过听录音和观看视 频能够对文本的句型表达 有更深入的认知和理解。 Teaching purpose 通过观察图片让学生 猜测 Miss White 在与谁交 谈，使用开放性的问题来激 发学生的好奇心及其表达 的欲望，进而引出本板块的 对话场景，帮助学生更好地 理解对话的语境。 43 T: After listening to the recording, please choose the right answer. Who is Miss White talking to? (2)Play the video and let students watch it carefully. （课件出 示：教材 P14 Let's talk 板块的视频）Then ask them to answer the question. T: What are they talking about? (Students can answer in Chinese.) Ss: … 4. Listen and answer (1)Let students read after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2)Let students read the dialogue by themselves. (3)Let students practice the dialogue in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out the dialogue in class. Step 3: Practice 1. Play a turntable game. There are some photos of different famous cartoon characters on the turntable. Let students use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce the famous cartoon character that is pointed to one by one. 2. Draw and say. Draw the simple picture of a woman on the blackboard, and lead students to say, “This is Miss Green.” Then draw the simple picture of a man, and lead students to say, “This is Mr Jones.” 3. Draw and introduce. Let students work in groups of four. One of the students draws a picture of his or her favourite teacher, and then introduces the person he/she draws to the other three students. For example: S1: This is Miss/Mr… S2/S3/S4: Good morning, Miss/Mr… Choose some students who draw well to come to the front and introduce the person they draw. Give some stars to the students who do a good job. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let's act. Teaching purpose 创设趣味情境，以学生 熟悉的童话故事《白雪公 主》为例，通过分组表演介 绍故事人物来激发学生的 学习兴趣，并进一步巩固核 心句型。 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读对话， 并能在小组中进行角色扮 演。Teaching purpose 通过游戏的形式，巩固 操练本课时的核心句型，可 以极大地提升学生的学习 热情，让学生真正地做到在 “学中玩，玩中学”。 Create an interesting acting environment. Let students work in groups of five. Let students introduce each other in groups. Choose the best group to show in class. For example: Show some headdresses of the cartoon characters in Snow White: the dwarf, the princess, the prince, the hunter, the queen. Let them introduce each other. S1(Princess): Hello! （Point to S2.） This is the prince. S2(Prince): Hi! （Point to S3.） This is the hunter. S3(Hunter): Good morning. （Point to S4.） This is the dwarf. S4(Dwarf): Good morning. （Point to S5.） This is the queen. S5(Queen): Hi!（Point to S1.） This is the princess. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let's talk”. 2. Use the new sentence structure to introduce your family members. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应 课时作业) ▶教学反思 1 活动设计形式丰富，易于操作，且具备层次感，较好地活跃了课堂氛围，同时也有效地提升了学生的核心 素养。 2 开放性问题的设置能激发学生的好奇心和求知欲，推动学生自主思考，让课堂教学更高效。 3 游戏环节的安排能极大地提升学生的学习兴趣，让学生真正地体会到英语学习的乐趣。 4 突出语用功能，联系学生和班级的实际情况，设置多个环节，环环相扣，层层深入，帮助学生在真实情境 中自然地使用所学语言。 5 板书设计一目了然，重点突出，为课堂教学提供了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let's talk ·Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue and read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation. · Be able to greet others with “Good morning.” in context. 45 ·Be able to use the sentence structure“This is…”to introduce other people properly in situations and address others as “Miss” or “Mr” correctly. Draw and say ·Be able to use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce the teacher's portrait and address others as “Miss” or “Mr” correctly. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key sentence structures “Good morning.” “This is…” of this lesson. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structure “This is…” correctly in real situations. ·Be able to address others as“Miss, Mr” correctly and distinguish their pronunciations. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Revision. Let students ask and answer one by one. 3. Lead-in. Show the pictures of Miss Green and Mr Jones. Teach the words “Miss” and “Mr”. 1. Greetings. 2. Ask and answer one by one. Review the sentence structures they have learnt. 3. Learn the words “Miss” and “Mr”. Say hello to the two characters in this period. Create a relaxing learning atmosphere by the greetings and the game. Review and consolidate the key sentence structures of the previous unit. Introduce the main characters of this period by showing the pictures of Miss Green and Mr Jones. Learn to address other people as “Miss” or “Mr” correctly and lead in the new lesson. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes 1. Teach the new sentences. (1)Show a picture of the rising sun on the PPT and teach the sentence “Good (1)Observe the picture and learn the sentence “Good morning.” (2)Learn the sentence Create a real situation to lead students to understand and learn Presentation morning.” (2)Create a real situation to teach the sentence structure “This is…” (3)Let students practice the sentence structure by introducing their classmates in groups. structure “This is…” (3)Introduce their classmates in groups by using the sentence structure “This is…” the new expressions. And fully practice, so that students can learn to use them in situations. 2. Look and guess. Show the picture of Miss White in “Let's talk”. Observe the picture and guess who Miss White is talking to. Stimulate students' curiosity and the desire to express with the open question. Lead in the scene of the dialogue in “Let's talk” and help students understand the context better. 3. Listen and answer. (1)Play the recording of “Let's talk”. Let students listen to the recording and finish the task. (2)Play the video and let students watch it carefully. Then ask them to answer the question. (1)Listen to the recording and choose the right answer. (2)Watch the video carefully and answer the question. Task-based teaching method can effectively concentrate students' attention. At the same time, students can have a deeper understanding of the sentence structures by listening to the recording and watching the video. 4. Read and act. Play the recording. Read after the recording. Read the dialogue by themselves. Practice the dialogue in groups and then act it out. Lead students to read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Practice 1. Play a turntable game. Use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce the famous cartoon character that is pointed to one by one. Use games to practice the key sentence structures and greatly improve students' enthusiasm for learning. Make sure that students 2. Draw and say. Draw the simple pictures Introduce the two people in the pictures with “This is 47 can learn while playing. on the blackboard. Miss Green.” and “This is Mr Jones.” 3. Draw and introduce. Let students work in groups of four. Choose some students who draw well to show in the front. Give some stars to the students who do a good job. Work in groups of four. One of the students draws a picture of his/her favourite teacher, and then introduce the person to the other three students. Consolidation & Extension Let's act. Create an interesting acting environment. Let students work in groups of five. Let students introduce each other in groups. Choose the best group to show in class. Act in groups to introduce each other. Create an interesting environment of the fairy tale Snow White. Stimulate students' learning interest and further consolidate the key sentence structures of this lesson. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let's talk”. 2. Use the new sentence structure to introduce your family members. 3. Do the exercises. The second period(第二课时) Part A Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听、说、认读颜色单词“red, yellow, green, blue” Let’s do ·能够听懂该板块的指令用语，并能按照指令用语做出相应的动作 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、认读表示颜色的单词“red, yellow, green, blue”。 ▶教学难点 能听懂 Let’s do 板块的指令用语，并能按照指令用语做出相应的动作。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰、颜色卡片、魔法棒等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hello, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Miss/Mr… T: Hello, S1! Good morning. S1: Hello, Miss/Mr… Good morning. T: Hello, S2! Good morning. S2: Hello, Miss/Mr… Good morning. T: Hello, S3! Good morning！ S3: Hello, Miss/Mr… Good morning. …… 2. Listen and do. T: Take out your pens, pencils, books, rulers and crayons. Now, please listen and do. (Demonstrate for students first.) Show me your book. T: Show me your ruler. Students show the rulers. T: Show me your pencil. Students show the pencils. T: Show me your crayon. Students show the crayons. … Students show the books. 3. Enjoy a song—Colour song. T: You all did a very good job! It’s a happy day! Let’s enjoy a nice song together! Play the recording and explain the word “rainbow” with the picture. （课件出示：教材 P20 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲音频和一张彩虹的图片） Step 2: Presentation 1. Learn the new words about colours. (1)Teach the word “red”. Show the magic stick and say “Three, two, one!”（课件出示：依 照翻译笔的点动，先呈现一只没有颜色的小狗，点一下变成红色小狗，接着 点第二下变成绿色小狗，点第三下变成黄色小狗，点第四下变成蓝色小狗） T: I have a magic stick. This is a dog. Three, two, one! Look! This is a red dog. Red, /e/-/ed/-/red/, red. Write down the word “red” on the blackboard and teach it in high and low voice. T: Red, red, red. I see red. Follow me, please! Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 拉近师生距离，创设愉快的 学习氛围，同时复习关于打 招呼的句型。 Teaching purpose 用关于颜色的歌曲来 活跃课堂气氛，同时引出本 课主题，为后面教授四个颜 色单词做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 教师通过示范让学生感 知句型“Show me your…”。 通过 TPR活动，让学生熟练 掌握指令性语言 “Show me your…”。 Teaching purpose 通过创设有趣的变魔 法的情境，激发学生的学习 兴趣，让学生能够借助图片 直观地理解和学习四个关 于颜色的单词，并在教师的 引导下初步感知新句型“I see…”。 49 Ss: Red, red, red. I see red. (2) Teach the word “green”. T: Three, two, one! Now, look! This is a green dog. Green, /gr/-/i:/，n/, /gri:n/, green. Write down the word “green” on the blackboard and teach it in high and low voice. T: Green, green, green. I see green. Follow me, please! Ss: Green, green, green. I see green. (3) Teach the word “yellow”. Let one student hold up the magic stick and say “Three, two, one!” T: A red dog? S1: No! T: A green dog? S1: No. T: Oh, this is a yellow dog. Read after me, please! Yellow, /je/-/ləʊ/, /’jeləʊ/, yellow. Write down the word “yellow” on the blackboard and lead students to read it several times. T: Yellow, yellow, yellow. I see yellow. Ss: Yellow, yellow, yellow. I see yellow. (4) Teach the word “blue”. T: There is another dog. What colour is it? Can you guess? S1: Red. S2: Green. S3: Yellow. … T: Let’s see. Say “Three, two, one！” together. Ss: Three, two, one! T: What colour? Ss: … T: Blue! This is a blue dog. Read after me! Blue, /bl/-/u:/, /blu:/, blue. Write down the word “blue” on the blackboard and lead students to read it several times. T: What colour do you see now? Ss: I see blue. 2. Look and say. Let students look at the picture and say the colours of the rainbow by using the sentence structure “I see…”quickly. (课件出示：教材 P15 Let’s learn 板块的图片) Write down the sentence structure “I see…” on the blackboard and let students practice it. 3. Read and act. Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读单词和 句子，并能在小组中进行角 色扮演。 Teaching purpose 通过让学生快速地用 英语表达看到的颜色来巩 固四个关于颜色的单词，并 学会使用句型“I see…”。 (1)Play the recording of“Let’s learn”. (课件出示：教材 P15 Let’s learn 板块的音频) Let students read after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2)Let students read the words and the sentences by themselves. (3)Let students practice in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out in class. Step 3: Practice 1. Play a bomb game. Ask one student to come to the front of the classroom. Let the student choose cards about colours and hold them up one by one. The game includes four rounds. Set one colour as the bomb of each round. Students say the colours according to the cards. When they see the bomb cards, they should say “bomb”. 2. Sharp eyes. (课件出示：依次闪现一支红色蜡笔，一支蓝色蜡笔，一支绿色蜡笔，一 支黄色蜡笔) Ask students to look carefully and say quickly with the sentence structure “I see a…crayon.” 3. Let’s do. (1)Show the picture of “Let’s do” on the PPT. (课件出示：教 材 P15 Let’s do 板块的图片) Let students listen and guess the meaning. （2）Listen and do. T: Take out your crayons. Now, please listen and do. (Demonstrate for students first.) Show me green. Students show the green crayons. T: Show me red. Students show the red crayons. T: Show me yellow. Students show the yellow crayons. T: Show me blue. Students show the blue crayons. T: Now, who can be a little teacher? Please give the instruction “Show me…” (Let the other students do as the little teacher says.) Write down the sentence structure “Show me…” on the blackboard and let students practice it.… 4. Let’s chant. Beat time and let students chant together. (出示课件) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Teaching purpose 巩固和拓展学生对颜 色单词的学习，提升学生的 综合语言运用能力。 Teaching purpose 通过游戏和 TPR 活动 来激发学生的学习兴趣，操 练和巩固核心词汇以及常 用表达，并为后面的拓展活 动做铺垫。 51 1. Find out the four colours in the classroom. T: There are different colours in our classroom. Look at the blackboard, the desks, the chairs, the pictures, the doors and the windows. Observe the objects carefully in the classroom and find out the four colours “red, yellow, green, blue”. 2. Show some world famous paintings. T: In this period, we have learned the four colours. There are other colours in our daily life. Colours can make our life more beautiful. What colour do you see? Let’s enjoy the colourful paintings together. (课件出示：色彩搭配经典的世界名画) Expand more words about colours to students, such as pink, grey, purple, orange… ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Make a new chant about the colours. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1 结合三年级学生的年龄特点，设置丰富多彩的趣味活动，极大地吸引了学生的注意力，并提升了他们的 学习兴趣。 2 寓教学活动于游戏，培养学生的动口动手能力，使得学生在说、做、听、读、玩中体会英语学习的乐趣。 3 注重语言交际能力的培养，让学生在课堂中真正地运用英语，并能将它们用于现实生活中。 4 活动设置层次分明，有梯度，有利于提升学生的思维能力。 5 板书设计简洁明了，为课堂教学提供了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to listen, speak and read the words about colours “red, yellow, green, blue”. Let’s do · Be able to understand the instructions and do the actions according to the instructions. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words about colours “red, yellow, green, blue”. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to understand the instructions of “Let’s do” and do the corresponding actions according to the instructions. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Listen and do. 3. Play a song and explain the word “rainbow”. 1. Greetings. 2. Listen to the instructions and do the actions. 3. Enjoy the song. 3. Enjoy the song. Create a pleasant learning atmosphere and review the sentence structures of greeting. Let students perceive the sentence structure “Show me your…” through the demonstration and master it through the TPR activity. Use the song to enliven the atmosphere of the class and prepare for the following study. Presentation 1. Teach the new words about colours “red, green, yellow, blue”. Learn the new words about colours. Create an interesting situation. Let students understand and learn the new words with the pictures. Lead students to preliminarily perceive the new sentence structure. 2. Look and say. Let students look at the picture and say the colours of the rainbow by using the sentence structure “I see…” quickly. Look at the picture and say the colours of the rainbow by using the sentence structure “I see…” quickly. Enhance students’ learning of the new words and the sentence structure “I see…” by saying the colours of the rainbow quickly. 3. Read and act. Play the recording of “Let’s learn”. Read after the recording. Read by themselves. Practice in groups and act Make sure that students can read the words and the sentences 53 out. correctly and fluently. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Play a bomb game. Set one colour as the bomb of each round. Say the colours according to the cards. Say “bomb” when the bomb cards appear. Use the games and the TPR activity to arouse students’ interest in learning. Practice and consolidate the key words and sentences. Get ready for the next step. 2. Sharp eyes. Ask students to look carefully and say quickly with the sentence structure “I see a… crayon.” Look carefully and say quickly with the sentence structure “I see a…crayon.” 3. Let’s do. (1)Show the picture of “Let’s do” on the PPT. Let students listen and guess the meaning. (2)Listen and do. Take out the crayons and do the actions according to the instructions. 4. Let’s chant. Beat time and let students chant together. Chant about the colours. Consolidation & Extension 1. Lead students to find out the four colours “red, yellow, green, blue” in the classroom. Observe the objects in the classroom. Then find out the four colours. Consolidate and expand students’ knowledge about colours. Develop students’ comprehensive ability of using language. 2. Show some world famous paintings. Expand some new words about colours. Enjoy the paintings and learn some new words about colours. Homework 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Make a new chant about the colours. 3. Do the exercises. The third period(第三课时) Part A Letters and sounds ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Letters and sound ·能够听、说、读、写字母 Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd ·能够在学习字母音形的基础上，初步掌握 3 个辅音字母作为单词首字母时的发音 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、读、写字母 Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd,并初步掌握 3个辅音字母作为单词首字母时的发音。▶教学难 点 能够掌握这四个字母的笔顺、书写格式及其在相关例词中的发音。 ▶教学准备 1. 预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、字母卡片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hi, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Miss/Mr… T: Good morning! Ss: Good morning! 2. Enjoy a song—ABC song.（课件出示：教材 P6 Let’s sing 板块的 歌曲） Sing the ABC song with students. T: It’s a happy song. Do you like it? Ss: Yes! T: What’s the first letter of the letter song? A, B, C or D? (Use body language to explain “the first letter”.) Ss: A. T: You are so great! 3. Lead-in. Show some letter cards to students. T: Look! Here are some letter cards. Try your best to get the cards. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new letters. (1) Learn the letter “Aa”. Show the letter card “A”. T: Look at the card. I see “A”. Follow me, please. A, A, A! Let students follow the teacher. Ask students to find out A-shaped things in their daily life. T: Can you say something that looks like “A”? (Students can answer in Chinese.) S1: 宝塔。 Teaching purpose 将字母教学和单词教 学相结合并融入语音知识， 引导学生自主探究字母在 单词中的发音规则。通过让 学生寻找生活中与字母形 状相同的物品来加强学习 的趣味性，强化学生对字母 知识的记忆。 Teaching purpose 用歌曲营造愉快的学 习氛围，同时也为新课的学 习做铺垫。通过展示字母卡 片，激发学生的学习兴趣， 进而导入新课。 55 S2: 金字塔。 … T: You are so clever! Now, look at the pictures and the words. Try to find the letter “Aa”. T: A, A, A! A is for apple! A, A, A! A is for ant! Can you find the similarity of the two words? (Students can answer in Chinese.) Ss: … T: Yes! The pronunciation of the letter “a” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/æ/”. /æ/, /æ/, /æ/, apple. / æ/, /æ/, /æ /, ant. Let students read after the teacher and practice several times. (2) Learn the letter “Bb”. Show the letter card “B”. T: Look! This is the letter “B”. B, B, B! Let students follow the teacher. Ask students to find out B-shaped things in their daily life. T: Can you say something that looks like “B”? (Students can answer in Chinese.) S1: 眼镜。 S2: 葫芦。 … T: Well done! Look at the pictures and the words. Point to the letter “Bb”. T: B, B, B! B is for book! B, B, B! B is for bag! Can you find the similarity of the two words? (Students can answer in Chinese.) Ss: … T: Yes! The pronunciation of the letter “b” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/b/”. /b/, /b/, /b/, bag. /b/, /b/, /b/, book. Let students read after the teacher and practice several times. (3) Learn the letter “Cc”. Show the letter card “C”. T: Look! This is the letter “C”. C, C, C! Let students follow the teacher. Ask students to draw C-shaped things they are familiar with. T: Can you draw something that looks like “C”? (Give an example to students first, such as drawing a moon.) Let students draw some other things that look like “C”. T: Now! Look at the pictures and the words. Find out the letter “Cc”, please! T: C, C, C! C is for cat! C, C, C! C is for crayon! Can you find the similarity of the two words? (Students can answer in Chinese.) Ss: … T: Yes! The pronunciation of the letter “c” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/k/”. /k/, /k/, /k/, cat. /k/, /k/, /k/, crayon. Let students read after the teacher and practice several times. (4) Learn the letter “Dd”. Show the letter card “D”. T: Look! This is the letter “D”. D, D, D! Let students follow the teacher. Ask students to draw D-shaped things they are familiar with. T: Can you draw something that looks like “D”? (Give an example to students first, such as drawing an open mouth.) Let students draw some other things that look like “D”. … T: Nice job! Look at the pictures and the words. Find out the letter “Dd”, please! T: D, D, D! D is for dog! D, D, D! D is for duck! Can you find the similarity of the two words? (Students can answer in Chinese.) Ss: … 57 T: Yes! The pronunciation of the letter “d” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/d/”. /d/, /d/, /d/, duck. /d/, /d/, /d/, dog. Let students read after the teacher and practice several times. 2. Listen, repeat and chant. Play the recording. (课件出示：教材 P16 Listen, repeat and chant 的音频) Let students listen to the recording carefully and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Show the chant of “Listen, repeat and chant” on the PPT. Play the recording again.（出示课件） T: Turn to page 16. Let’s listen and chant together! Step 3: Practice 1. Listen and circle. （1）Show the pictures of “Listen and circle”. (课件出示：教材 P16 Listen and circle 的图片) Let students observe the pictures and try to predict the key words. (2) Play the recording. (课件出示：教材 P16 Listen and circle 的 音频) Let students listen and circle the letters. （3）Check the answers with students. (Answers: d; c; b; c; d) 2. What’s missing? (1) Let students find out the missing letter in each word according to the pictures. (2) Let students read aloud the complete words. (apple, book, ant, cat, dog) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. (1) Write down the letters “Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd” on the blackboard step by step. Ask students to write them down in their exercise books. Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读字母和 chant。 Teaching purpose 通过认真观察四线三 格中字母的笔顺和正确的 书写格式来培养学生规范 的英文书写习惯，最后用字 母操增强字母知识学习的 趣味性。 Teaching purpose 引导学生观察图片进 行听前预测，降低听力任务 的难度。通过听音圈出听到 的单词的首字母，巩固新 知。以补充单词首字母的形 式让学生进一步在单词中 感知新学的字母。 Choose some students to write on the blackboard. Let students pay attention to the correct stroke order and writing form of the letters. (2) Prepare the cards of the four letters. Choose one student to come to the podium. Let the student hold up the cards one by one, and the other students read the corresponding letters quickly. 2. Do the alphabet exercises. Play a video about the alphabet (A, B, C, D) exercises.（课件出 示：字母操视频的 A~D 片段） Ask students to sing and do the actions after the video. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the chant of this period. 2. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 活动设计丰富多彩，较大地激发了学生的学习热情，同时也有效地提升了学生的核心素养。 2. 教学活动以学生为主体，培养了学生的自主探究能力，充分发挥了学生的学习主动性。 3. 通过寓教于乐的教育方式，让学生在玩中学、学中用，较好地完成了教学目标。 4. TPR 教学法的应用活跃了课堂氛围，建立了良好的师生关系。 5. 板书设计具有规范性，为学生正确书写习惯的培养打下了良好的基础。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Letters and sounds · Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd”. · Be able to master the pronunciation of the three consonants as the first letter in words. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd” and master the pronunciation of the three consonants as the first letter in words. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to master the stroke order and the writing form of the four letters as well as the pronunciation of the four letters in related words. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy a song. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the ABC song with Use the song to create a 59 Lead-in 3. Lead-in. Show some letter cards to students. the teacher. 3. Try to get the letter cards. pleasant learning environment and prepare for the study of the new lesson. Stimulate students’ interest in learning and lead in the topic of this period by showing the letter cards. Presentation 1. Teach the new letters “Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd”. Show the letter cards. Ask students to find out or draw things that look like the letters. Teach the pronunciation of the letters in the related words. Learn the new letters. Find out or draw things that look like the letters. Learn the pronunciation of the letters in the related words. Combine the teaching of letters with the teaching of words. Lead students to explore the pronunciation rules of the letters in different words independently. Enhance the fun of learning and strengthen students’ memory of letter knowledge by asking students to look for the objects in the same shape as the four letters. 2. Listen, repeat and chant. Play the recording. Show the chant. Listen to the recording carefully. Pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Then listen and chant together. Lead students to read the letters and the chant with correct pronunciation and intonation. Practice 1. Listen and circle. (1) Show the pictures of “Listen and circle”. (2) Play the recording. (3) Check the answers with students. (1) Observe the pictures and try to predict the key words. (2) Listen and circle the letters. (3) Check the answers. Reduce the difficulty of completing the listening task by observing the pictures and predicting the key words. Consolidate the new knowledge by circling the letters. And let students further 2. What’s missing? (1) Let students find out the missing letter in each word. (2) Let students read aloud the (1) Find out the missing letters. (2) Read aloud the complete words. perceive the letters in words by finding out the missing letters. complete words. Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. (1) Write down the letters “Aa, Bb, Cc, Dd” on the blackboard step by step. (2) Prepare the cards of the four letters. Write down the letters in their exercise books. Pay attention to the correct stroke order and writing form of the letters. Form the correct writing habit. Use the alphabet exercises to make the alphabetic learning more interesting. 2. Do the alphabet exercises. Sing and do the actions after the video. Homework 1. Practice the chant of this period. 2. Do the exercises. The fourth period(第四课时) Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够在情景中运用句型“Good afternoon.”问候他人并回应他人的问候 ·能够在情景中运用句型“Nice to meet you.”表达初次相识或被人介绍而相识时相互间 的 问候 Let’s play ·能够在语境中正确运用“Good afternoon.”“Nice to meet you.”问候他人 ▶教学重点 能够在语境中正确运用句型“Good afternoon.”“Nice to meet you.”, 要求语音准确、语调自然。 ▶教学难点 能够读准单词“afternoon”的发音。 ▶教学准备 1. 预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰、Zoom 和 Zip 的手偶等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Good morning, boys and girls! Ss: Good morning, Miss/ Mr… 2. Sing a song—Good morning. Play the song with the melody of Happy New Year. (课件出示:歌曲 《Happy New Year》的旋律) Let students follow the teacher to sing. Teaching purpose 创编歌曲活跃课堂气 氛，同时复习重点句型 “Good morning.”和“This is…”，为接下来新课的学习 做铺垫。 61 T: Follow me, please! 3. Free talk. Show some pictures of the cartoon characters on the PPT. (课件 出示：一些卡通人物的图片) Let students introduce the cartoon characters with the sentence structure “This is…” freely. Step 2: Presentation 1. Learn the new sentences. (1) Review and learn. ① Review the sentence “Good morning.”(课件出示：关于 “morning” 的小视频) T: Look! It’s morning now! How do you greet others in the morning? Ss: Good morning. T: Well done! ②Teach the sentence“Good afternoon.”(课件出示：关于“afternoon” 的小视频) T: Is it morning now? Ss: No! T: It’s afternoon now! Teach students the pronunciation and the meaning of the word “afternoon”. Let students follow the teacher and practice it several times. T: How do you greet others in the afternoon? Who can have a try? … T: Good afternoon. Write down the sentence “Good afternoon.” on the blackboard. Let students follow the teacher and practice it with their partners. (2) Create a situation to teach the sentence “Nice to meet you.” Show a picture of Mike. (课件出示: Mike 的图片) T: This is our new friend, Mike. It’s the first time we meet. How do you greet him? Think it over! S1: Hello, Mike! S2: Hi! Mike! S3: Good morning/afternoon, Mike! … Teaching purpose 通过小视频的对比让学 生 更 加 直 观 地 理 解 “afternoon”的意思以及如 何运用“Good afternoon.”来 问候他人。通过创设情境引 导学生轻松学习和准确运用 “Nice to meet you.”以及 “Nice to meet you, too.”。 Teaching purpose 卡通人物的呈现能够迅 速吸引学生的注意力，并能 强烈地刺激学生的表达欲 望，从而对句型“This is…” 进行巩固练习。 T: When we meet someone for the first time, we can also say “Nice to meet you.” Teach students the pronunciation and the meaning of “Nice to meet you.” Then tell students how to use “Nice to meet you, too.” Write down the sentences “Nice to meet you.” “Nice to meet you, too.” on the blackboard. Let students practice the two sentences. 2. Listen, watch and do. (1) Show the picture of“Let’s talk”on the PPT.（课件出示：教 材 P17 Let’s talk 板块的图片）Introduce the background of the picture. Lead students to observe the picture and predict the main idea of the dialogue. (2) Watch and answer. ①Play the video of “Let’s talk”. (课件出示：教材 P17 Let’s talk 板块的视频) Let students underline the key sentences about the questions in their books. ②Answer the questions. T: How does Mike introduce Wu Yifan? Ss: “Hi, Mum. This is Wu Yifan.” T: How does Mike’s mum greet Wu Yifan? Ss: “Good afternoon, Wu Yifan.” T: How does Wu Yifan greet Mike’s mum? Ss: “Good afternoon. Nice to meet you.” T: How does Mike’s mum answer Wu Yifan? Ss: “Nice to meet you, too.” (3) Number the sentences. Play the recording of“Let’s talk”.（课件出示：教材 P17 Let’s talk 的音频） Let students listen to the dialogue and number the sentences. Check the answers together. Teaching purpose 带着问题观看视频，让 学生有目的地听录音并且提 取文本关键信息；通过听音 排序的方式，帮助学生更深 入地理解文本对话，进而掌 握所学语言。 63 (Answers: 3 4 2 1) 3. Read and act. (1) Let students read after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the dialogue by themselves. (3) Let students practice the dialogue in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out the dialogue in class. Step 3: Practice 1. Let’s play. (1) Make a new dialogue. Show the hand puppets of Zoom and Zip. Let students imitate the dialogue of “Let’s play” and make their own dialogues. For example: S1: Good afternoon, S2. This is Zoom. S2: Hello, Zoom! This is Zip. Nice to meet you. S1: Nice to meet you, too. (2) Ask students to show their dialogues on the podium. 2. Let’s sing. Play a song with the melody of Happy birthday. Let students learn to sing. (课件出示：歌曲《Happy Birthday》的旋律) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension “Meet new friends!”. Show some pictures of the cartoon characters. (课件出示：一些卡 通人物的图片) Say the sentences “Good afternoon, everyone!” “Nice to meet you.” like Mickey Mouse. Lead students to answer with the sentences “Good afternoon, Mickey Mouse!” “Nice to meet you, too.” Use different cartoon characters to greet students. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 Teaching purpose 通过手偶活动来让学 生创编对话并分角色表演， 以此激发学生的学习兴趣， 并巩固核心句型。通过歌曲 来操练核心句型，并为后面 的拓展活动做准备。 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读对话， 并能在小组中进行角色扮 演。 Teaching purpose 用问候卡通人物的方 式巩固本节课的问候用语， 让学生学会在真实的情境 中运用本节课所学的句型。 4. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 5. Make a new dialogue. 6. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作 业) ▶教学反思 1. 活动设计丰富，易于操作，符合三年级学生的年龄特点和认知水平，有效地提升了学生的核心素养。 2. 卡通人物的加入激发了学生的好奇心和求知欲，让课堂教学更高效。 3. 游戏能极大地提高学生的学习兴趣，让学生真正地体会到英语学习的乐趣。 4. 创设多个情境，逐步呈现新知，让学生在实际情景中感知、学习新知。 5. 板书设计一目了然，重点突出，为课堂教学提供了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to use “Good afternoon.” to greet others and respond to greetings in situations. · Be able to use “Nice to meet you.” to greet someone we first meet in situations.. Let’s play · Be able to greet others with “Good afternoon.” “Nice to meet you.” correctly in context. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to use the sentences “Good afternoon.” “Nice to meet you.” correctly in context with correct pronunciation and intonation. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to pronounce the word “afternoon” accurately. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song—Good morning. 3. Free talk. Show some pictures of the cartoon characters on the PPT. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song with the teacher. 3. Introduce the cartoon characters with the sentence structure “This is…” freely. Create a song to enliven the class atmosphere and review the sentence structures “Good morning.”“This is…” Prepare for the following study. Presentation 1. Learn the new sentences. (1) Play a video about “morning” to review “Good morning.” and play a video about “afternoon” to teach “Good afternoon.” (2) Create a situation to teach “Nice to meet you.” (1) Watch the videos. Review “Good morning.” and learn “Good afternoon.” Then practice with partners. (2) Learn “Nice to meet you.” Then practice the sentences “Nice to Let students understand the meaning of “afternoon” more directly and learn how to use the sentence “Good afternoon.” to greet others by comparing the two videos. Create a 65 meet you.” and “Nice to meet you, too.” situation to lead students to learn and use the sentences “Nice to meet you.” and “Nice to meet you, too.” 2. Listen, watch and do. (1) Show the picture of “Let’s talk” on the PPT. Introduce the background of the picture. Lead students to observe the picture. (2) Play the video. Let students answer the questions. (3) Play the recording. Let students number the sentences. (1) Observe the picture and predict the main idea of the dialogue. (2) Watch the video and answer the questions. (3) Listen and number the sentences. By watching the video with questions and listening to the recording to number the sentences, help students understand the text more deeply and master the new knowledge. 3. Read and act. Read after the recording. Read the dialogue by themselves. Practice the dialogue in groups and act it out. Lead students to read the dialogue correctly and fluently, then act out the dialogue in groups. Practice 1. Let’s play. (1) Show the hand puppets of Zoom and Zip. Let students imitate the dialogue and make their own dialogues. (2) Ask students to show their dialogues. Make their own dialogues and show on the podium. Stimulate students’ interest in learning and consolidate the key sentence structures through making their own dialogues. Use the song to practice the key sentence structures and prepare for the following study. 2. Let’s sing. Play a song with the melody of Happy birthday. Learn to sing the song. Consolidation & Extension “Meet new friends!” Show some pictures of the cartoon characters. Use the sentences “Good afternoon.” “Nice to meet you.” to greet different cartoon characters. Consolidate the sentence structures through greeting the cartoon characters. Let students learn to use the sentence structures in real situations. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a new dialogue. 3. Do the exercises. The fifth period(第五课时) Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听、说、认读颜色单词“black, white, orange, brown” Let’s do ·能够听懂该板块的指令，并能够按照指令做出相应的动作 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、认读表示颜色的单词“black, white, orange, brown”。 ▶教学难点 能够读准单词“brown, white”的发音。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰、教学实物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Good morning/ afternoon, boys and girls! Ss: Good morning/ afternoon, Miss/ Mr… T: Nice to meet you, S1! S1: Nice to meet you, too. T: Nice to meet you, S2! S2: Nice to meet you, too. … 2. Enjoy a song—What colour is it? (出示课件) Play the song and ask students to sing along with it. T: What colours can you hear in this song? S1: Red. S2: Yellow. S3: Green. S4: Blue. T: Great! Today we are going to learn more words about colours. Step 2: Presentation Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 来拉近师生距离，同时复习 上节课 Let's talk 的核心句 型。歌曲营造愉快的学习氛 围，在复习学过的颜色单词 的同时自然导入新课。 67 1. Learn the new words about colours. Show a magic box with some toys and an orange in it. (1) Learn the word “white”. Take out a white toy rabbit from the box. T: This is a magic box. We can find different colours in it. Look! What’s this? Ss: 兔子。 T: What colour is it? Do you know? Is it red? Ss: No. T: It’s white. Write down the word “ white” on the blackboard. Teach the pronunciation and the meaning of it. Ask students to pay attention to the pronunciation of the letter “i” which pronounces “/aɪ/”. Let students practice it row by row. T: White, white, white! Can you point to the white things in our classroom? Students point to the wall, the paper… (2) Learn the word “black”. Take out a black toy car from the magic box. T: What’s this? Ss: 小汽车。 T: What colour is it? … Write down the word “black” on the blackboard. Teach the pronunciation and the meaning of it. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation of the letter “a”. T: /blæk/. Read after me. Black, black, black. … T: Do you like black? Can you point to the black things in our classroom? Students point to the blackboard, the clothes, the schoolbag… (3) Learn the word “brown”. Take out a brown teddy bear from the magic box. T: Look at the bear. Is it black? Ss: No. T: Is it white? Ss: No. T: It’s brown. /br/, /aʊ/, /braʊn/. Write down the word “brown” on the blackboard. Lead students to read and practice it in high and low voice. (4) Learn the word “orange”. Let students touch the fruit in the magic box. T: Touch the fruit! What is it? Teaching purpose 利用魔术盒里不同物品 的颜色来教授新单词，增强 学习趣味性的同时，加深学 生对颜色单词的记忆。 S1: 梨子。 S2: 苹果。 … T: It’s an orange. What colour is it? …Write down the word “orange” on the blackboard. Lead students to read it several times. T: The orange is orange. Orange, orange, orange! Students practice it line by line. 2. Draw and colour. Ask students to draw some simple pictures with a pencil on the paper, including a bear, a cat, a squirrel and a pig. T: Show me the bear. Students show the picture of the bear. T: Colour it brown! Write down the sentence structure “Colour it…!” on the blackboard. Ask students to colour the picture of the bear with the brown crayon. T: Show me the cat. Colour it white! Let students read the sentence “Colour it white!” and use the crayon to colour the cat white. Lead two students to say the sentences “Colour it orange!” and “Colour it black!” Then let students follow the instructions to colour the pig black and the squirrel orange. 3. Read and act. Play the recording of “Let’s learn”. (课件出示：教材 P18 Let’s learn 板块的音频) (1) Let students read after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the words and the sentences by themselves. (3) Let students practice in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out in class. Step 3: Practice 1. Look and say. Show some pictures in different colours. (课件出示：橙色的树叶， 黑色的小狗，棕色的帽子，白色的裙子，黑色的包，棕色的袜子，白色的手 绢，橙色的衬衣) Let students say the colours according to the pictures. T: Here are some pictures. You can see different colours in them. Let’s have a look. T: What colour can you see? S1: I can see… S2: I can see… Teaching purpose 通过让学生观察图片说 出不同的颜色以及快速反应 的游戏，让学生操练本单元 所学的颜色单词。 Teaching purpose 让学生通过自己动手来 体会句型“Colour it…！”的 意思，实现在“做中学，学 中做”的目的。 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读对话， 并在小组中进行角色扮演。 69 S3: I can see… … 2. Quick response. Show the words “black, white, orange, brown, red, green, yellow, blue”on the PPT randomly and quickly. (出示课件) Let students say the words loudly and quickly. T: Look at the PPT! Please say the words you see loudly and quickly. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let’s do. （1）Show the pictures of “Let’s do”. (课件出示：教材 P18 Let’s do 板块的图片) Let students watch and guess the meanings of the sentences. （2）Listen and do. Write down the phrases “stand up, sit down, touch the ground, turn around” on the blackboard. Explain the meanings of the phrases with body language. Do the actions and say the instructions. Let students do and say after the teacher. T: Black, black. Stand up. Students stand up and repeat. T: Orange, orange. Sit down. Students sit down and repeat. T: White, white. Touch the ground. Students touch the ground and repeat. T: Brown, brown. Turn around. Students turn around and repeat. (3) Divide the whole class into four groups. Say the instructions faster and faster. Let the four groups compete to do the actions. The best group will get the prize. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Make some word cards about colours. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) Teaching purpose TPR教学法可以极大提 升学生的学习热情，真正地 让学生在 “做中玩，玩中 学”；同时巩固本节课所学的 新单词以及指令语。 ▶教学反思 1 注重教学活动的多样性、趣味性、新颖性和竞争性，真正地实现了 “快乐学习” 的法则。 2 TPR 教学法让每个学生都动起来，鼓励学生积极融入教学实践活动中，极大地提高了课堂教学的效率。 3 注重语言交际能力的培养，让学生在课堂中学会运用英语进行交流。 4 板书设计条理清晰，一目了然，重点突出。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn ·Be able to listen, speak and read the four new words about colours “black, white, orange, brown”. Let’s do ·Be able to understand the instructions and do the corresponding actions according to the instructions. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words about colours “black, white, orange, brown”. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to pronounce the words “brown, white” accurately. ▶Teaching Procedures 71 Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy a song—What colour is it?. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing along with the song. Help students review the key sentences of last lesson and the words about colours they have already learned. Then lead in the topic of this period. Presentation 1. Teach the new words about colours. (1) Take out a white toy rabbit from the magic box and teach the word “white”. (2) Take out a black toy car from the magic box and teach the word “black”. (3) Take out a brown teddy bear from the magic box and teach the word “brown”. (4) Let students touch the orange in the magic box and teach the word “orange”. Learn the new words about colours with different objects. Pay attention to the pronunciation and the meanings of the new words. Practice the words after the teacher. Use a magic box to show some objects in different colours. Lead students to learn the new words about colours in an interesting way. 2. Draw and colour. Ask students to draw some simple pictures with the pencil and teach the sentence structure “Colour it…!” Listen to the instructions and colour the pictures. Lead students to learn while doing and do while learning. 3. Read and act. Read after the recording. Read the words and the sentences by themselves. Practice in groups and act out. Make sure that students can read the words and the sentences correctly and fluently. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Look and say. Say the colours according to the pictures. Use different activities to practice the key words of this unit. 2. Quick response. Say the words loudly and quickly. Consolidation & Extension Let’s do. (1) Show the pictures of “Let’s do”. (2) Do the actions and say the instructions. (3) Say the instructions faster and faster. (1) Watch and guess the meanings of the sentences. (2) Do and say after the teacher. (3) Compete in groups. Use TPR teaching method to enhance students’ enthusiasm for learning and consolidate the new words and sentences. Homework 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Make some word cards about colours. 3. Do the exercises. The sixth period The sixth period (第六课时) Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Start to read ·能够找出并能听、说、读、写图片中的字母 ·能够听、说、认读表示颜色的单词“red, green, yellow, blue, black, white, orange, brown” Let’s check ·能够独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习 Let’s sing ·能够听懂、跟唱歌曲，并能创编新的歌曲 ▶教学重点 能够掌握本单元所学的字母和表示颜色的单词。 ▶教学难点 能够独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习。 ▶教学准备 1. 预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、颜色卡片、蜡笔等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in Teaching purpose 通过师生间的相互问候 拉近师生距离；通过歌曲和 TPR活动营造愉快、活跃的 73 1. Greetings. T: Hi, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Miss/Mr… T: Good afternoon/morning, S1! S1: Good afternoon/morning, Miss/Mr… … 2. Enjoy a song—ABC song. （课件出示：教材 P6 Let’s sing 板 块的歌曲） T: Let’s sing the song together. Clap your hands, please! 3. Listen and do. Say the instructions and let students do the actions. T: Orange, orange. Sit down. Black, black. Stand up. White, white. Touch the ground. Brown, brown. Turn around. Step 2: Presentation 1. Find and say. (1) Sharp eyes. T: Boys and girls! There are many stars on the PPT. Read the letters on the stars immediately when they appear. Let’s look and read them quickly. (2) Find and say. Let students look at the picture and find out the letters in it. (课件出示：教材 P19 Find and say 的图片) Try to find out the most letters. T: Here is a beautiful picture. We can see many beautiful things. Wow! Look! I see a big letter “C”. (Point to the big letter “C”.) What letters do you see? S1: I see… S2: I see… S3: I see… S4: I see C, a, D… … Ask students to count the letters. T: How many big letters “A/B/C/D” do you see? Ss: I see… “A/B/C/D”. T: How many small letters “a/b/c/d” do you see? Ss: I see… “a/b/c/d”. 2. Review the words about colours. Teaching purpose 利用观察、找一找、说 一说的方式来复习、认读和 识别所学字母。 Teaching purpose 先通过让学生说出自 己喜欢的颜色来复习学过 的颜色单词。接着通过找朋 友的游戏来提升英语学习 的趣味性，并进一步巩固对 颜色单词的记忆。 (1) Ask students a question “What colour do you like?” Lead students to answer with the words about colours. Give the relevant colour cards they like to students. T: What colour do you like? S1: Red. S2: Blue. S3: Yellow. … (2) Find friends. Ask students to try to remember their classmates’ favourite colours. Students who can remember their favourite colours mutually will be friends. 3. Read and tick. Show the picture of “Read and tick” on the PPT. (课件出示：教 材 P19 Read and tick 的图片) Explain the rule of the task and make a demonstration first. Then let students read and tick by themselves. T:（Point to the red barrel.） Look! What colour is it? Ss: It’s red. T: Great. It’s a red barrel. Can you see the word “red”? Ss: Yes. T: So we should tick on the square frame of the red barrel. Please finish the rest. Check the answers together. (Answers: √blue √black √brown √green √yellow √red) Step 3: Practice 1. Listen and tick or cross. (1)Show the pictures of“Listen and tick or cross”on the PPT. (出 示课件) Let students look at the four pictures. Ask some questions to help them predict the meaning of the pictures. T: What can you see in the pictures? S1: I can see… S2: I can see… … T: Who can you see in Picture 2 and Picture 3? S1: I can see Miss white and Mr Jones. S2: I can see Wu Yifan, Mike and… T: Good! The man in Picture 3 is Mike’s Dad. They are our friends. What are they talking about? Now, let’s listen and tick or cross. (2) Play the recording and let students finish the task. (课件 出示：教材 P20 Listen and tick or cross 的音频) Ask students to pay attention to the key words. (3) Check the answers with students. Teaching purpose 通过读和打对勾的方 式来检测和巩固学生对于 颜色单词的掌握。 Teaching purpose 请学生先观察图片再 听录音，对学生进行有效的 听力技巧指导，同时强调听 音重点，帮助学生完成听力 任务。 75 (Answers: 1.√ 2.× 3.× 4.×) 2. Match and colour. Show the pictures of “Match and colour” on the PPT. (出示课件) Let students say the colours they have learned one by one. Then ask them to finish the task by themselves. T: Can you say the colours in English quickly? S1: Blue. S2: Red. S3: Black. … T: Well done! Now, please match the words to the pictures. Then colour the pictures with your crayons. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension “Story time” 1. Let’s sing! (1) Play the video of the song for the first time. (课件出示： 教材 P20 Let’s sing 板块的视频) Let students listen to it carefully. T: How many colours can you hear? What are they? Ss: … （2）Play the song again. （出示课件） Lead students to clap their hands and sing with the video. Let them practice in groups. Invite some students to sing on the podium, and the others sing and clap hands for them. （3）Make a new song and draw a different rainbow. Let students try to make a new song. For example: Let students draw a different rainbow by themselves. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Sing the song to your family members. 2. Read the story of “Story time”. 3. Do the exercises.（见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业） Teaching purpose 通过将单词与对应的 颜色图片连线和涂色的活 动，进一步操练和巩固颜色 单词。 Teaching purpose 让学生给歌曲打拍子， 营造活跃的学习氛围。接着 让学生自主创编新歌，并画 出自己心目中不一样的彩 虹，培养学生的发散性思 维，增强创造力和审美能 力。 ▶教学反思 1 注重新旧知识的串联，做到以旧带新，以新温旧。 2 设置的教学活动简单易行，能有效激发学生的学习兴趣。 3 以旧带新，可以降低学生的学习难度，使学生在轻松的学习氛围中巩固旧知，学习新知。 4 板书设计条理清晰，一目了然，突出重点。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Start to read ·Be able to find as well as listen, speak, read and write the letters in the picture. ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words about colours “red, green, yellow, blue, black, white, orange, brown”. Let’s check ·Be able to finish the task independently. Let’s sing ·Be able to understand and sing the song, and make a new song. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to master the letters and the words about colours of this unit. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to finish the task of “Let’s check” independently. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy a song. 3. Listen and do. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song with the teacher. 3. Do the actions according to the instructions. Stimulate students’ interest in learning and review the knowledge they have learned through the song and the TPR activity. Presentation 1. Find and say. (1) Sharp eyes. Show some stars with letters on the PPT. (2) Find and say. Show the picture of “Find and say”. (1) Look and read the letters quickly. (2) Try to find out the most letters. Lead students to review the letters they have learned by observing, finding and saying. 2. Review the words about colours. (1) Ask students a question and give the relevant colour cards they like to students. (1) Answer the question. (2) Try to remember their classmates’ favourite colours Create an interesting learning environment and consolidate the memory of the words about colours. 77 (2) Lead students to find out their friends. 3. Read and tick. Show the picture of “Read and tick”. Explain the rule of the task and make a demonstration first. Read and tick independently. Make sure that students can finish the task correctly and independently. Check students’ mastery of the words about colours. Practice 1. Listen and tick or cross. (1) Show the pictures and talk about them. (2) Play the recording. Ask students to pay attention to the key words. (3) Check the answers with students. Listen to the recording and finish the task. Use different activities to train students’ ability of listening and speaking. Practice and consolidate the words about colours by matching and colouring. 2. Match and colour. Review the words about colours and let students match and colour. Match the words to the pictures first. Then colour the pictures with the crayons. Consolidation & Extension Lead students to learn the song and sing with the video. Let students make a new song and draw a different rainbow.6. Let’s practice and act out. Listen to the song. Clap hands and sing with the video. Practice in groups. Share it with the class. Try to make a new song and draw a different rainbow. Create an active learning environment. Cultivate students’ divergent thinking. Enhance students’ creativity and aesthetic ability. Homework 1. Sing the song to your family members. 2. Read the story of “Story time”. 3. Do the exercises. Unit 3 Look at me! 教材分析 本单元学习的主题是五官和身体部位。教学内容主要是围绕孩子们在上学路上和在 Mike 家 发生的故事来展开的。教学重点是能够听懂、会说核心句型“Look at me. This is my/the/a/an…” “—How are you? —I’m fine, thank you./Very well, thanks.” “Let’s…”；能够听、 说、认读单词“ear, eye, nose, mouth, face, head, hand, arm, body, leg, foot”。 教学目标 知识与能力目标: 句型 ·能听懂、会说句型“Look at me. This is my/the/a/an…”“—How are you? —I’m fine, thank you./ Very well, thanks.”“Let’s…” 词汇 ·能听、说、认读单词“ear, eye, nose, mouth, face, head, hand, arm, body, leg, foot” 字母与语音 ·能正确听、说、读、写字母 Ee, Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii 并知道其在单词中的发音 能力目标: ·能够在图片、实物或情境的帮助下运用句型“Look at me. This is my/the/a/an…”向别人 介绍自己或别人的五官和身体部位 ·能够在情境中运用句型“—How are you? —I’m fine, thank you./Very well, thanks.” 有礼貌地询问别人的近况并进行回答 ·能够在情境中运用句型“Let’s…”向别人提议一起做某事并进行回答 ·听到字母能说出其对应的发音 情感态度､文化意识､学习策略目标: ·培养保护眼睛和牙齿的意识 ·能够建立单词音、义、形之间的联系，整体学习单词 课时安排 第一课时: Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play 第二课时: Part A Let’s learn & Let’s do 第三课时: Part A Letters and sounds 第四课时: Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play 第五课时: Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do 第六课时: Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing 79 The first period(第一课时) Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够通过听录音，用正确的语音、语调朗读对话，并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够在语境中运用“—How are you?—I’m fine, thank you.”来询问别人近况并回答 ·能够运用句型“Let’s…”向别人提议一起做某事 Let’s play ·能够学唱歌曲，并能通过歌曲和游戏巩固重点句型 ▶教学重点 1能够在语境中运用“—How are you? —I’m fine, thank you.”来询问别人近况并回答。 2能够运用句型“Let’s…”向别人提议一起做某事。 ▶教学难点 能够在真实的语境中运用本课时所学重点句型自然流利地进行对话。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、课本插图、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s do. Play the video of “Let’s do” on page 18. （课件出示：教材 P18 Let’s do 板块的视频） Ask students to sing and do the actions after it. 3. Free talk. T: Hello/Good morning/Good afternoon, …! Ss: Hello! … T: Nice to meet you! Ss: Nice to meet you, too. … Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the sentences “—How are you? — I’m fine, thank you.” T: Boys and girls, look out of the window please. It’s sunny today. I’m very happy. Look at me. I’m fine. Help students get the meaning of “I’m fine.” with body language and facial expressions. Teaching purpose 以熟悉的活动进行热 身，有利于激发学生的学习 兴趣，营造良好的英语学习 氛围。同时通过自由对话， 帮助学生复习打招呼用语， 为新知的学习奠定基础。 Teaching purpose 谈话中自然引入新句 子，使学生易于理解和掌 握。 T: What about you? How are you? Lead students to answer with the sentence “I’m fine, thank you.” Write down “—How are you? —I’m fine, thank you.” on the blackboard and let students read several times. T: How are you? Ss: I’m fine, thank you. 2. Teach the sentence structure “Let’s…” and the word “school”. T: You see, it’s really a nice day. Let’s play basketball after school, OK？ Ss: OK! T: Let’s play football/fly a kite/ride a bike/play chess/row a boat… Help students understand the sentence structure “Let’s…” with body language. Point to the watch and take the schoolbag. T: Oh, It’s time for class. Let’s go to school. Ss: OK! Write down “—Let’s go to school. —OK！” on the blackboard and teach the word “school”. 3. Look and say. Show the two pictures of “Let’s talk”. （课件出示: 教材 P24 Let’s talk 板块的图片） Let students look at the pictures carefully. Ask some questions to help them predict the main idea of the dialogue. The questions are like these:  Who is the girl? What does the girl say to the bird?  Who is the boy? Where are they? What are they doing? T: Look at the pictures. What can you see in Picture 1? What can you see in Picture 2? Now answer my questions. Ss: … 4. Read and act. (1) Play the cartoon for the first time. （课件出示：教材 P24 Let’s talk 板块的视频） Ask students to read after the recording. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Play the cartoon again. Let students practice the dialogue in groups and fill in the blanks. （课件出示：教材 P24 Let’s talk 板块的填空题） (3) Let students wear the headdresses and role-play, then share it with the class. Step 3: Practice 1. Chain work. Divide students into several groups. Let students ask and answer in two chains. Chain 1: Teaching purpose 通过肢体语言，让学生 初步感知和理解句型“Let’ s…”的含义，所给例句贴 近学生的生活实际，便于学 生较快、较好地掌握新知， 为接下来的学习做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观 察并讨论图片，借助图片预 测教学内容，培养学生的观 察能力和逻辑推理能力。通 过预测图片内容激活已有 知识，并提取与文本有关的 知识，进入文本话题。 Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读。引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读对话，并在 小组中进行角色扮演。以补 全句子的形式进行文本再 构，帮助学生梳理重点知 识，加强对重点句型的记 忆。 81 S1: How are you? S2: I’m fine, thank you. How are you? S3: I’m fine, thank you. How are you? … Chain 2: S1: Let’s go to school, S2. S2: OK! Let’s go to school, S3. S3: OK! … … The fastest group can get a prize. 2. Let’s play. (1) Play the recording of “Let’s play”. （课件出示：教材 P24 Let’s play 板块的音频） Help students get the meaning of the song. (2) Play the recording again. Let students sing after the recording. （课件出示：教材 P24 Let’s play 板块的听力材料） (3) Lead students to practice the song in groups, clap hands and sing together, then show it to the class. Let students go around the classroom, sing the song and give their classmates a high-five. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Make a dialogue. Let students make their own dialogues in pairs according to the example. 2. Find friends. T: Boys and girls, Let’s play a game. When the music begins, go around the classroom and talk to others with the sentence “Let’s go to school.” If he/she answers “OK！”, you can be friends. Find as more friends as you can. When the music stops, you should go back to your seat. Now, begin. T: How many friends do you have? Who are they? Give a present to the student who does the best performance. 3. Enjoy the song—Teddy Bear. Play a video of the song.（课件出示：歌曲《Teddy Bear》的视频） Ask students to enjoy the song and try to sing after it. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 引导学生在真实的语 境中创编对话，培养学生综 合语言运用能力。通过“找 朋友”的游戏，帮助学生在 真实的语境中自然地运用 句型，进而达到学以致用、 提升学生口语交际能力的 目的。最后，学生观看歌曲 视频，在轻松愉快的氛围中 结束本节课的学习，并为下 一节课的学习奠定基础。 Teaching purpose 让学生在分组竞赛中 巩固并操练句型，培养他们 的合作竞争意识。引导学生 打着节拍学唱歌曲，通过多 样化的教学形式吸引学生 的注意力，培养学生的节奏 感。 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Sing the song of “Let’s play” to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1借助天气引入本课两个重点句型，过渡自然;充分利用肢体语言和面部表情，让学生初步感知新句型；所 给例句贴近学生的生活实际，便于学生理解和掌握。 2让学生观察图片，借助图片预测教学内容，注重对学生观察能力的培养和学习方法的指导。 3创设情境教学，让学生在真实的语境中自然流利地运用本课句型进行对话，培养学生的综合语言运用能 力。 4活动设计丰富且具有针对性，能让不同层次的学生得到较好的训练。 5板书设计清晰明了，重点突出，起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the pictures. · Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. · Be able to use “—How are you?—I’m fine, thank you.” in context to ask and answer the question about the recent situations. · Be able to use the sentence structure “Let’s…” to advise others to do something together. Let’s play · Be able to sing the song and consolidate the key sentence structures through songs and games. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to use “—How are you?—I’m fine, thank you.” in context to ask and answer the question about the recent situations. ·Be able to use the sentence structure “Let’s…” to advise others to do something together. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to have a natural and fluent conversation with the key sentence structures of this lesson in real context. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes 83 Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s do. Play the video of “Let’s do” on page 18. 3. Free talk. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and do the actions after the video. 3. Have a free talk with the teacher. Stimulate students’ interest in learning and create a good English learning atmosphere. Help students review the knowledge they have learnt. And lay the foundation for the learning of new knowledge. Presentation 1. Help students get the meaning of “I’m fine.” with body language and facial expressions. Teach the sentences “—How are you? —I’m fine, thank you.” Learn the sentences “—How are you? — I’m fine, thank you.” Lead in the new sentences properly. Make it easy for students to understand and master the key sentences. 2.Teach the sentence structure “Let’s…” and the word “school”. Learn the sentence structure“Let’s…” and the word “school”. Use body language to help students preliminarily perceive the sentence structure. Prepare for the next part. 3. Look and say. Show the two pictures of “Let’s talk”. Ask some questions to help students predict the main idea of the dialogue. Look at the pictures carefully. Think and talk about the questions to predict the main idea of the dialogue. Lead students to observe and talk about the pictures with questions. Cultivate students’ observation and logical reasoning ability. Activate the existing knowledge by predicting the content of the pictures. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 4. Read and act. Play the cartoon of “Let’s talk”. Ask students to read after the recording. (1) Watch the cartoon and read after the recording. (2) Practice in groups and fill in the blanks. (3) Role-play and share it with the class. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Help students sort out the key knowledge and strengthen their memory of the key sentence structures. Practice 1. Chain work. Divide students into several groups. Let students ask and answer in two chains. Ask and answer in two chains. Let students practice the key sentence structures in groups. Cultivate students’ sense of cooperation and competition. Lead students to sing the song in rhythm. Attract students’ attention and cultivate their sense of rhythm. 2. Let’s play. Play the recording of “Let’s play”. Help students get the meaning of the song. Listen to the song. Sing after the recording. Practice the song in groups. Consolidation & Extension 1. Make a dialogue. Make a dialogue in pairs according to the example. Create a real situation to develop students’ comprehensive language using ability. Help students use the sentence structures skillfully in real context through the game. 2. Find friends. Play the game and try to find as more friends as they can. 3. Enjoy the song— Teddy Bear. Play a video of the song. Enjoy the song and try to sing after the video. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue. 2. Talk about your schoolbag with your partner. 3. Do the exercises. The second period(第二课时) 85 Part A Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听、说、认读五官单词“face, ear, eye, nose, mouth” ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s learn 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解句子的意 思 ·能够通过多种活动运用句型“Look at me! This is my…”介绍自己的五官 Let’s do ·能够在图片、动作和音频的帮助下理解、跟读歌谣 ·能够根据指令做出相应的动作或根据动作说出相应的指令性用语 ▶教学重点 1能够听、说、认读所学的五官单词。 2能够在情景中运用句型“Look at me! This is my…”介绍自己的五官。 ▶教学难点 能够听懂“Let’s do”板块的指令性用语，并能够根据指令做出相应的动作。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、人物头饰、卡通手偶等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song. Play the recording of “Let’s play” on page 24. （课件出示： 教材 P24 Let’s play 板块的音频） Ask students to sing after it. 3. Revision. Let students review the dialogue of “Let’s talk” on page 24 through role play. （课件出示：教材 P24 Let’s talk 板块的对话） Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new words. (1) Teach the word “face”. T: Boys and girls, I have lots of friends. Do you want to know them? Take out a hand puppet of Sun Wukong. Point to the face of the hand puppet. T: Hello, everyone! I’m Sun Wukong. Nice to meet you! Look at me! This is my face. Face, /f/-/eɪ/-/s/, /feɪs/. Teach the sentence “Look at me!” by body language, and teach the word “face” by pointing to different students’ faces. Teaching purpose 课前问候，增强师生之 间的情感互动。歌曲热身， 活跃课堂气氛，激发学生学 习新知的欲望。帮助学生复 习旧知，巩固所学知识，为 新课学习奠定基础。 Teaching purpose 以学生熟悉的卡通人物 引入新知，贴近学生的生活 实际。引导学生介绍自己的 五官并为卡通人物配音，从 而达到学以致用的目的。自 编歌曲，将重点单词和句型 融入其中并用学生熟悉的旋 律唱出来，加深学生对单词 及句型的理解和记忆。 Write down the sentences “Look at me! This is my face.” on the blackboard. Let students introduce their faces with the sentences “Look at me! This is my face.” Lead students to sing the chant with the melody of Two tigers. （课 件出示：歌曲《两只老虎》的旋律） （2）Teach the word “ear”. Take out a hand puppet of Bugs Bunny. T: Hello, everyone! I’m Bugs Bunny. Nice to meet you. Look at me！ This is my ear. Ear, /ɪə(r)/. Use the word card to teach the word “ear”. Ask students to read the word in different ways. Write down the word “ear” on the blackboard. Let students dub the hand puppet with the sentences “Look at me! This is my ear.” Replace the word “face” in the chant with “ear”. Lead students to sing the chant. (3) Teach the word “eye”. Show a panda on the PPT. （课件出示：熊猫的图片） Dub the panda. T：Hello, I’m Panpan. Nice to meet you! Look at me! This is my eye. Eye, /aɪ/. Teach the word “eye” by the game “Simon says”. （游戏说明：当老师说“Simon says: Eye.”的时候，学生大声朗读 eye; 当老师只说“Eye”的时候，学生捂住嘴巴不能出声。） Write down the word “eye” on the blackboard. Let students introduce their eyes with the sentences “Look at me! This is my eye.” Replace the word “face” in the chant with “eye”. Lead students to sing the chant. （课件出示：与 eye 有关的 chant 及其旋律） (4) Teach the word “nose”. Show a picture of a cartoon character on the PPT. （课件出示： 卡通人物的图片） Dub the cartoon character. T：Hi, I’m Peppa Pig. Nice to meet you! Look at me! This is my nose. Nose, /n/-/əʊ/-/z/, /nəʊz/. Teach the word “nose” by the game “Catch the finger”. 87 （游戏说明：学生朗读单词的同时用食指快速戳老师的掌心，被老师捉 到则挑战失败，反之则算成功。） Write down the word “nose” on the blackboard. Let students dub the cartoon character with the sentences “Look at me! This is my nose.” Replace the word “face” in the chant with “nose”. Lead students to sing the chant. （课件出示：与 nose 有关的 chant 及其旋律） (5) Teach the word “mouth”. Show a picture of a hippo on the PPT. （课件出示：一只河马的图 片） Dub the hippo. T：Hi, I’m a hippo. Nice to meet you! Look at me! This is my mouth. Mouth, /m/-/aʊ/-/θ/, /maʊθ/. （Pay attention to the pronunciation of “th/θ/”.） Teach the word “mouth” by the game “High and low voice”. Write down the word “mouth” on the blackboard. Let students dub the hippo with the sentences “Look at me! This is my mouth.” Replace the word “face” in the chant with “mouth”. Lead students to sing the chant. （课件出示：与 mouth 有关的 chant 及其旋 律） 2. Read and act. T: I have another friend. Who is he? Is he Wu Yifan? Oh, no! He is Zoom now. Play the cartoon of “Let’s learn”. （课件出示：教材 P25 Let’s learn 板块的视频） Let students number the words first according to the recording. Play the cartoon again and let students read after it. Then let students wear the headdress of Zoom and make an introduction with the sentence structure “Look at me! This is my…” Step 3: Practice 1. Sharp eyes. Show the words “face, ear, eye, nose, mouth” and the pictures of them one by one on the PPT. （课件出示：依次出示五官的单词和图片） T: Class, please look at the pictures and the words carefully. If you know one of them, you can stand up and read it aloud. Now, begin! 2. I can draw. Invite some students to the front. Cover their eyes and let them draw pictures according to the teacher’s instructions. Let them introduce their pictures with the sentence structure “Look at me! This is my…” Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. I say, you do. Teaching purpose 通过“我说你做”和“我 做你说”的活动，调动学生 多种感官参与学习，激发学 生的学习热情。根据图片提 示补全句子的设计，强化学 生对单词和句型的记忆。 Teaching purpose 让学生听音给单词标序 并跟读，锻炼学生听和说的 能力。让学生戴上头饰模拟 自我介绍，创设情境教学， 提高学生的综合语言运用能 力。 Teaching purpose 通过设计“火眼金睛” 小游戏，帮助学生操练单词， 同时调动学生的学习积极 性。蒙眼画五官并进行介绍， 培养学生的动手动口能力， 从而学以致用。 Play the cartoon of “Let’s do” for the first time. （课件出 示：教材 P25 Let’s do 板块的视频） Lead students to get the meanings of the sentences. Play the cartoon again, and lead students to do the actions after it. Help students understand the meanings of the words “close, open, touch” with body language and some pictures. （课件出示：close, open, touch 的相关图片） Ask students to do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions and practice in groups, then show to the class. S1: Close your eyes. S2: (Do the action.) … … 2. I do, you say. One student does the actions, and the other students say the sentences. Then let students fill in the blanks. 3. Enjoy the song—If you are happy and you know it. Play the video of the song. （出示课件） Ask students to sing after it. ▶板书设计 89 ▶作业设计 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Introduce your features with the key sentence structure to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1采用“我说你画”“我说你做”“我做你说”等不同的操练游戏，调动学生多种感官参与，使他们积极地 参与课堂活动。 2充分发挥多媒体资源辅助教学的优势，选取了如“孙悟空”“兔八哥”“小猪佩奇”等学生熟悉的卡通人 物，贴近学生的生活实际，并配以实物、音频、视频等辅助教学，课堂内容丰富多彩，激发了学生的学习兴趣。 3创设情境教学，让学生在真实的语境中自然流利地运用本课重点句型，培养了学生的综合语言运用能力。 4板书设计精美，重点突出，起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to listen, speak and read the new words “face, ear, eye, nose, mouth”. · Be able to understand the meanings of the sentences by observing and talking about the pictures and with the help of the PPT and the teacher. · Be able to use the sentence structure “Look at me! This is my…” to introduce the features. Let’s do · Be able to understand and read the chant with the help of the pictures, the actions and the recording. · Be able to do the corresponding actions according to the instructions or say the corresponding sentences according to the actions. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the new words “face, ear, eye, nose, mouth”. ·Be able to use the sentence structure “Look at me! This is my…” to introduce the features. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to understand the instructions of “Let’s do” and do the corresponding actions according to the instructions. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song. Play the recording of “Let’s play” on page 24. 3. Revision. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song. 3. Review the dialogue of “Let’s talk” on page 24 through Role-play. Stimulate Students’ interest in learning. Help students review the lesson they have learnt. Prepare for the new lesson. Presentation 1. Teach the new words. (1) Take out a hand puppet of Sun Wukong and dub it. Teach the new sentences “Look at me! This is my face.” Teach the word“face”. (2) Take out a hand puppet of Bugs Bunny and dub it. Teach the word “ear” by the word card. (3) Show a panda on the PPT. Teach the word “eye” by the game “Simon says”. (4) Show a picture of a cartoon character and dub it. Teach the word “nose” by the game “Catch the finger”. (5) Show a picture of a hippo and dub it. Teach the word “mouth” by the game “High and low voice”. (1) Learn the sentences and the word. Try to introduce their own faces. Sing the chant. (2)Learn the word“ear”by the word card. Try to dub the puppet and sing the chant. (3) Learn the word “eye” by the game “Simon says”. Try to introduce their eyes and sing the chant. (4) Learn the word “nose” by the game “Catch the finger”. Try to dub the cartoon character and sing the chant. (5) Learn the word “mouth” by the game “High and low voice”. Try to dub the hippo and sing the chant. Lead in the new lesson with the cartoon characters that students are familiar with, then students can understand and master easily. Help students practice and consolidate the words and the sentence structure through introducing and dubbing. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes 91 Presentation 2. Read and act. Play the cartoon of “Let’s learn”. Let students number the words and read after the recording. Watch the cartoon. Number the words and read after the recording. Wear the headdress of Zoom and make an introduction. Let students number the words and read after the recording to train Students’ listening and speaking ability. Create a situation to teach. Improve Students’ comprehensive language using ability. Practice 1. Sharp eyes. Show the words “face, ear, eye, nose, mouth” and the pictures of them one by one on the PPT. Play the game. Try to read aloud the words they know as fast as they can. Stimulate students’ interest. Consolidate the new vocabulary in this lesson through games. 2. I can draw. Give instructions. Cover the eyes and draw pictures according to the Teacher’s instructions, then introduce the pictures. Help students practice the words and the sentence structure through the activities. Train Students’ practice and speaking ability. Consolidation & Extension 1. I say, you do. Play the cartoon of “Let’s do”. Ask students to do the actions according to the instructions. Do the actions according to the instructions. Attract Students’ attention through various teaching forms. Help students strengthen the memory of the words and the sentence structure. 2. I do, you say. Ask students to say the sentences according to the actions and fill in the blanks. Say the sentences according to the actions. Fill in the blanks. 3. Enjoy the song—If you are happy and you know it. Play the video of the song. Enjoy the song. Sing after the video. Homework 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Introduce your features with the key sentence structure to your family. 3. Do the exercises. The third period(第三课时) Part A Letters and sounds ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Letters and sounds ·能够听、说、读、写 Ee， Ff， Gg， Hh， Ii 五个字母 ·能够在学习字母音、形的基础上，初步掌握两个元音字母在单词中的发音和三个辅音字 母作为单词首字母时的发音 ▶教学重点 1能够听、说、读、写字母 Ee， Ff， Gg， Hh， Ii。 2能够初步掌握两个元音字母在单词中的发音和三个辅音字母作为单词首字母时的发音。 ▶教学难点 能够掌握所学字母的笔顺以及相关例词的发音。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、字母卡片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy the song—ABC song. Play the recording of the song. （课件出示：教材 P6 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲音频） Ask students to sing after it. 3. Revision. Students chant with the teacher and show the letter cards. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the letters “Ee, Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii”. T: We have so many letter friends like “Aa” “Bb” “Cc” “Dd”. Today, we’ll meet five new letter friends. Who are they? Let’s have a look! Show the cartoon image of the letter “Ee” on the PPT. （课件 出示：字母 Ee 的卡通形象及其录音） T: Can you find something that looks like “Ee” in your daily life? Ss： … Show some pictures that contain “Ee”. （课件出示：包含字母 Ee 的图片） Write down the letter “Ee” on the blackboard. Let students show their fingers and write after the teacher. Let them pay attention to the capital letter and lowercase letter. Teaching purpose 通过歌曲热身，营造良 好的英语语音教学氛围。通 过吟诵两段有韵律的 chant， 帮助学生复习字母 A到 D， 为新授内容做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 借助课件并通过卡通动 画的形式呈现字母，让知识 变得生动、有趣。引导学生 联想生活中像字母的物品， 培养学生的观察和联想能 力。提醒学生注意区分字母 的大小写，注重对学生学习 方法的指导。 93 Lead in and teach the letters “Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii” in the same way. （课件出示：字母 Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii 的相关图片及其录音） 2. Let’s match. Show a task of matching the capital letters to the lowercase letters. Ask students to finish it. 3. Listen and repeat. (1) Play the video. （课件出示：教材 P26 Listen, repeat and chant 的视频）Let students read after it. (2) Show the picture on the PPT. （课件出示：教材 P26 Listen, repeat and chant 的图片）Let students read the words after the recording. Teach the words by word cards. (3) Lead students to summarize the pronunciation of the letter “e”. Let students clap their hands and chant: Ee, Ee, Ee, /e/, /e/, /e/, egg, egg, elephant, elephant. (4) Use the same method to teach the other four letters. （课件 出示：依次出示字母 Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii 的相关内容） 4. Let’s chant. Play the recording of the chant. Ask students to chant after the recording. Then lead students to clap their hands and do the actions after the teacher. Step 3: Practice 1. Listen and circle. Teaching purpose 通过连线题 ,检测学生 对字母大小写的掌握情况， 并强化学生对字母大小写的 区分和记忆。 Teaching purpose 引导学生总结字母的发 音，培养学生的自主学习能 力，激发学生的学习积极性。 利用图片及单词卡片辅助教 学，并让学生打着节拍吟诵 chant，增强趣味性的同时还 能培养学生的节奏感。 Teaching purpose 在听力练习之前，预留 时间让学生对图片加以熟 悉，引导学生根据图片内容 对听力文本进行听前预测， 注重对学生学习方法的指 Show the pictures on the PPT. （课件出示：教材 P26 Listen and circle 的图片） Help students say the corresponding words according to the pictures. Let students read the letters below the pictures correctly. Play the recording. （课件出示：教材 P26 Listen and circle 的音 频） Let students listen and circle. Then check the answers together. （Answers: g; h; f; e; i） 2. Fill in the blanks. Show some letter cards and invite some students to the front. Lead students to choose the right cards to fill in the blanks. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. Play the cartoon. （课件出示：教材 P26 Write and say 的视频） Let students watch it carefully. Remind them to pay attention to the stroke order and other tips. Then ask students to write the letters in the correct stroke order in their books. 2. Bingo. Ask students to write down the letters “Aa” to “Ii” in “Sudoku” in disorder and play the game. （游戏说明：学生在九宫格内按照任意顺序写出 Aa 到 Ii 等大小写字母 组合，教师任意挑选其中三个字母组合，这三个字母组合在九宫格内能连成 任意一条直线的则视为 Bingo，获得 Bingo 的学生将得到奖励。） ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Copy the letters five times. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1将字母的音、形学习与图片相结合，给学生以视觉冲击，提高了学生的学习兴趣。 Teaching purpose 提醒学生注意字母在四 线三格内的书写顺序。通过 Bingo 的游戏，提高学生的 学习热情，强化学生对字母 的记忆，同时检测学生的学 习效果。 95 2 鼓励学生寻找和发现生活中像字母的物品，教学方式贴近学生的生活实际，帮助他们克服畏难的心理， 降低学习难度，体现学以致用的原则。 3注重对学生学习方法的指导，包括对学生听的指导和写的指导。在听力练习之前，为学生预留时间思考， 在教授新字母的书写时，先做好示范。 4突出学生的主体地位，教师以引导为主，尽可能给学生足够的空间，如通过听例词、读例词、学例词， 让他们自己总结字母的发音规律。 5 整 个 教 学 过 程 流 程 清 晰 ， 可 以 较 好 地 达 到 课 时 教 学 目 标 。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Letters and sounds · Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Ee, Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii”. · Be able to master the pronunciation of the two vowels in words and the three consonants as the first letter in words on the basis of learning the pronunciation and form of the letters. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Ee, Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii”. ·Be able to master the pronunciation of the two vowels in words and the three consonants as the first letter in words. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to master the stroke order of the letters and the pronunciation of the example words. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy the song—ABC song. 3. Revision. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song. 3. Chant with the teacher and show the letter cards. Create a good English learning atmosphere. Help students review the letters and prepare for the new lesson. Presentation 1. Teach the letters “Ee, Ef, Gg, Hh, Ii”. Create a situation and lead in the letters by the PPT. Let students find things that look like the letters in their daily life. Let students write the letters with their fingers. Learn the new letters. Read the letters after the recording. And find things that look like the letters in their daily life. Write the letters with their fingers after the teacher. Lead in the letters in a funny way. Lead students to find the things that look like the letters in daily life to cultivate Students’ ability of observation and association. Pay attention to the guidance on Students’ learning methods. 2. Let’s match. Show a task of matching the capital letters to the lowercase letters. Try to match the capital letters to the lowercase letters. Strengthen the memory of the capital letters and the lowercase letters through the task. 3. Listen and repeat. (1) Play the video. (2) Show the picture on the PPT. Let students read the words after the recording. Teach the words by word cards. (3) Lead students to summarize the pronunciation of the letter “e”. Let students clap their hands and chant. (4) Use the same method to teach the other four letters. (1) Watch the video and read after it. (2) Look at the picture on the PPT. Read the words after the recording. Learn the words by word cards. (3) Try to summarize the pronunciation of the letter “e”. Clap their hands and chant. (4)Learn the letters “Ff, Gg, Hh, Ii” in the same way. Lead students to summarize the pronunciation of the letters. Develop Students’ autonomous learning ability. Elevate Students’ learning initiative. Train students’ sense of rhythm. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 4. Let’s chant. Play the recording of the chant. Lead students to clap their hands and do the actions. Chant after the recording. Clap their hands and do the actions after the teacher. Practice 1. Listen and circle. Show the pictures on the PPT. Help students say the words according to the pictures. Play the recording. Then check the answers. Say the words according to the pictures. Then read the letters below the pictures correctly. Listen to the recording and circle the letters. Check the answers. Lead students to predict the listening text according to the pictures. Help students get the learning methods. Cultivate Students’ ability of practice and thinking. Deepen the memory of the letters. 97 2. Fill in the blanks. Show some letter cards and invite some students to choose the right cards to fill in the blanks. Try to choose the right cards to fill in the blanks. Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. Play the cartoon. Remind students to pay attention to the stroke order and other tips. Watch the cartoon carefully. Pay attention to the stroke order and other tips. Then write the letters in the correct stroke order in their books. Lead students to write the letters correctly. Cultivate Students’ interest in learning. Strengthen the memory of the letters and check the learning effects. 2. Bingo. Ask students to write down the letters “Aa” to “Ii” in “Sudoku” in disorder and play the game. Write down the letters “Aa” to “Ii” in “Sudoku” in disorder and play the game. Homework 1. Copy the letters five times. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. The fourth period(第四课时) Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够通过听录音，用正确的语音、语调朗读对话，并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够听懂并运用核心句型“—How are you?—Very well, thanks.”来询问别人近况并 回答 ·能够运用句型“Let’s make a puppet！”向别人提出建议 Let’s play ·能够完成句子接龙活动以及运用“How are you?”询问别人近况并知晓其多种回答形式 ▶教学重点 能够理解和掌握本课时的重点句型“—How are you?—Very well, thanks.”“Let’s make a puppet!”。 ▶教学难点 1能够在真实的语境中运用本课重点句型自然流利地进行对话。 2能够掌握“very well”和“thanks”的读音。 ▶教学准备 1. 预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、句型卡片、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and do. Play the video of the song—If you are happy and you know it. （出 示课件） Lead students to sing and do the actions. 3. Make a daily talk. T: Good morning/afternoon, A. How are you? A: I’m fine, thank you. Good morning/afternoon, B. How are you? B: I’m fine, thank you. Good morning/afternoon, C. How are you? C: … … Step 2: Presentation 1. Look and predict. Show the picture of “Let’s talk”. （课件出示：教材 P27 Let’s talk 板块的图片） Let students look at the picture carefully. Ask some questions to help students predict the main idea of the dialogue. The questions are like these: （1）Who can you see in the picture? （2）Where are they? 2. Teach the sentence “Very well, thanks.” (1) Play the video of “Let’s talk”. （课件出示: 教材 P27 Let’s talk 板块的视频） Help students get the overall perception of the text. T: How is Mike? What does he say? Ss: … (2) Take out the sentence card of “Very well, thanks.” T: When others ask you “How are you?”, if you're fine, you can say “Very well, thanks.” Students ask the teacher “How are you?” and the teacher answers with the sentence “Very well, thanks.” Write down “—How are you? — Very well, thanks.” on the blackboard. Teaching purpose 以富有节奏感的歌曲热 身，带动学生根据歌词内容 做出相应的动作，激发学生 的学习兴趣。通过日常问候， 帮助学生巩固所学句型，为 新课的学习做准备。 Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观察 并讨论图片，借助图片预测 教学内容，培养学生的观察 能力和逻辑推理能力。通过 预测图片内容激活已有知 识，并提取与文本有关的知 识，进入文本话题。 Teaching purpose 利用已学知识，自然引 入新知。用卡片教授句型， 简单直接。在此期间，教师 纠正学生的发音，突破重点 和难点。 99 (3) Teach the pronunciation of “very well” and “thanks”. Let students read one by one. T: Boys and girls, please pay attention to my mouth. /v/, /v/, /v/, very! /e/-/el/-/wel/, well! Very well! Ss: Very well! T: Look at my mouth. The letter combination “th” pronounces “/θ/”. Follow me, /θæŋks/, thanks! Ss: Thanks! (4) Read the words several times, then let students point and say. S1: How are you? S2: Very well, thanks. How are you? S3: … … 3. Teach the sentence structures “—Let’s make a puppet! —Great!” （1）Ask the questions and play the video again. （出示课件） T: What are Sarah and Mike going to do? What does Sarah say? Ss: Sarah says， “Let’s make a puppet!” Show a picture of a puppet and teach the word “puppet”. （课 件出示：puppet 的相关内容）Let students listen and repeat the sentence. （2）Help students get the meaning of “great” by body language. Teach the word “great”. （课件出示：great 的相关内容） Hold the picture of “puppet” and say to different students loudly ， “Let’s make a puppet!” Lead students to answer with “Great!” and give a high-five. Write down “—Let’s make a puppet!—Great!”on the blackboard. 4. Read and act. (1) Play the recording of “Let’s talk”.（出示课件）Let students read after the recording. Remind them to pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Play the recording again. Ask students to repeat and practice the dialogue in pairs. Then let them fill in the blanks. (3) Let students wear the headdresses and act out the dialogue, then show it to the class. Step 3: Practice Teaching purpose 通过肢体语言，帮助学 生理解重点词句，进而引导 学生理解文本内容。 Teaching purpose 播放录音，让学生听录 音跟读。引导学生按照正确 的语音、语调朗读对话，并 在小组中进行角色扮演。以 补全句子的形式进行文本再 构，帮助学生梳理重点知识， 加强对重点句型的记忆。 Teaching purpose 通过自编 chant，将所学 重点句型完美地融合在学生 熟悉的旋律中，进而增强学 生的自信心，提高其学习积 1. Let’s sing. Lead students to sing the chant with the melody of Two tigers and do the actions. （课件出示：歌曲《两只老虎》的旋律） Let students sing in groups and show it to the class. Give the prize to the best group. 2. Let’s play. T: Sarah and Mike are making a puppet. They are very happy. What about their friends? Let’s have a look! Play the cartoon of “Let’s play”. （课件出示: 教材 P27 Let’s play 板块的视频） Ask students to enjoy the cartoon. Let students read the dialogue after the cartoon. Act out the dialogue with three students to make a model. Lead students to play the game in groups of four. Let students ask and answer in a chain by using their real names. The fastest group can get the prize. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension “Find friends.” T: Let’s play a game. Find friends who want to do the same things with you. Now draw what you want to do on the paper. When the music begins, go around the classroom, greet your classmates and find friends to go to school with you, play basketball with you, make a puppet with you and so on. When the music stops, you should go back to your seat. Now, begin! Ask two students to make a demonstration: S1: Hi! / Hello! How are you? S2: I’m fine, thank you. How are you? S1: Very well, thanks. Let’s… S2: Great! T: What do you want to do? Who does it with you? How many friends do you have? Who are they? … ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 引导学生在纸上画出想 做的事，在教室自由走动， 用所学句型问好并邀请对方 一起做某事从而找到好友。 创设趋于真实的情境，让学 生在情境中对话，培养学生 的综合语言运用能力。 101 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Sing the chant. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1让学生观察图片，借助图片预测教学内容，注重对学生观察能力的培养和学习方法的指导。 2将所学知识与学生的生活实际相联系，创编歌谣让学生熟练运用新句型，增强了学生的自信心，帮助学 生在轻松、愉快的氛围中掌握新知。 3创设情境教学，让学生在真实的语境中自然流利地运用本节课句型进行对话，培养了学生的综合语言运 用能力。 4重难点突出，较好地完成了既定教学目标。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the pictures. · Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. · Be able to understand and use the key sentence structures “—How are you? —Very well, thanks.” to ask and answer the question about recent situation. · Be able to use the sentence “Let’s make a puppet!” properly. Let’s play ·Be able to finish the task and use the sentence “How are you?” to ask others about their recent situations and know how to answer it in different ways. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key sentence structures “—How are you? —Very well, thanks.” “Let’s make a puppet!” ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the key sentence structures of this lesson in real situations. ·Be able to master the pronunciation of “very well” and “thanks”. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and do. Play the video of the song—If you are happy and you know it. Lead students to sing and do the actions. 3. Make a daily talk. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing and do the actions. 3. Try to make a daily talk. Stimulate Students’ interest in learning. Help students consolidate the sentence structures they have learnt and prepare for the new lesson. Presentation 1. Look and predict. Show the picture of “Let’s talk”. Ask some questions. Look at the picture carefully. Think and talk about the questions to predict the main idea of the dialogue. Lead students to observe and talk about the picture with questions. Cultivate Students’ observation and logical reasoning ability. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 2. Teach the sentence “Very well, thanks.” (1) Play the video of “Let’s talk”. Help students get the overall perception of the text. (2) Teach the sentence “Very well, thanks.” by the sentence card. (3) Teach the pronunciation of “very well” and “thanks”. (4) Read the words several times, then let students point and say. (1) Watch the video of “Let’s talk”. Try to get the overall perception of the text. (2) Learn the sentence “Very well, thanks.” (3)Learn the pronunciation of “very well” and “thanks”. (4) Practice the words and the sentences. Lead in the new knowledge properly. Correct Students’ pronunciation. Break through the teaching priorities and difficulties. 103 3. Teach the sentence structures “—Let’s make a puppet! —Great!” (1) Play the video again. Ask some questions and teach the word “puppet”. (2) Help students get the meaning of “great” by body language and teach the word “great” . (1) Watch the video again and answer the questions. Listen and repeat the sentence. (2) Learn the word “great”. Practice the sentence structures. Use body language to help students understand the key words and sentence structures. 4. Read and act. （1）Play the recording of “Let’s talk”. （2）Play again. Let students practice the dialogue and fill in the blanks. (3) Let students wear the headdresses and act out the dialogue. (1) Read after the recording. Pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Listen and repeat. Practice the dialogue in pairs. Then fill in the blanks. (3) Wear the headdresses and act out the dialogue. Then show it to the class. Lead students to read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Help students sort out the key knowledge and strengthen the memory of the key sentence structures. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Let’s sing. Lead students to sing the chant with the melody of Two tigers and do the actions. Sing the chant and do the actions. Sing in groups and show it to the class. Combine the key sentence structures with the familiar rhythm. Cultivate Students’ sense of rhythm. Enhance Students’ self-confidence. Let students practice the key sentence structures skillfully in context. 2. Let’s play. Play the cartoon of “Let’s play”. Act out the dialogue with three students to make a model. Lead students to play the game by using their real names. Enjoy the cartoon. Read the dialogue after the cartoon. Act out the dialogue with the teacher and then work in groups of four to play the game. Consolidation & Extension “Find friends.” Let students draw what they want to do on the paper, go around the classroom, greet their classmates and find friends who want to do the same things with them. Draw what they want to do on the paper and play the game. Attract Students’ attention. Create a real situation to develop Students’ comprehensive language using ability. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Sing the chant. 3. Do the exercises. The fifth period(第五课时) Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听、说、认读表示身体各部位名称的六个单词“head, hand, body, arm, leg, foot” ·能够在图片、PPT 和教师的帮助下理解 Let’s learn 板块中句子的含义 ·能够在情景中运用句型“This is the…”介绍身体各部位 Let’s do ·能够在图片、动作和音频的帮助下理解、跟读歌谣 ·能够根据指令做出相应的动作或根据动作说出相应的指令性用语 ▶教学重点 1能够听、说、认读表示身体各部位名称的六个单词“head, hand, body, arm, leg, foot”。 105 2 能够在情景中运用句型“This is the…”介绍身体各部位。 ▶教学难点 能够区分单词“head”与“hand”的发音。 ▶教学准备 1. 预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、木偶等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Revision. （1）Ask students to act out the dialogue of “Let’s talk” on page 27. （2）Play the video of “Let’s do” on page 25. （出示课件） Lead students to do the actions according to the video together. 3. Lead-in. Play the video of the song—Head and shoulders, knees and toes. （课件出示：教材 P30 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲视频） Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new words. （1）Teach the words “head， hand”. Show the picture of a cartoon character on the PPT. （出示课件） Dub the cartoon character. T: Boys and girls, do you still remember me? Ss: Yes. T: Nice to see you again! This is my face/ear/eye/nose/mouth. And this is my head. This is my hand. （课件出示：一个卡通人物的图片， 突出其相应的部位） Teach the words “head, hand”. （课件出示：head 和 hand 的相关内 容） Ask students to read the words after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation. T: Please look at my mouth. /e/, /e/, /e/, /ed/, /hed/. /æ/, /æ/, /æ/, /æn/, /ænd/, /hænd/. Teach the words by word cards. Lead students to chant and do the actions. Hand,↗ hand,↘ this is the hand.↘ Clap my hands. （Do the action.） Head,↗ head,↘ this is the head.↘ Touch my head. （Do the action.） Pay attention to the pronunciation of “the”. Write down the words “head, hand” and the sentence structure “This is the…” on the blackboard. （2）Teach the words “body, arm”. Teaching purpose 通过 TPR活动，调动学 生多种感官参与，在轻松愉 快的氛围中复习旧知。通过 歌曲引出新知，吸引学生注 意力，创造良好的英语学习 环境,为新课的学习做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 通过熟悉的卡通人物， 自然导入新知。以多种形式 教授新词，并且做到词不离 句。通过自编 chant，将单词 和句型整合，让学生边说边 做动作，加深学生对单词和 句型的理解和记忆。 Show the picture of the cartoon character on the PPT. Circle the cartoon character’s body and arm.（课件出示：该卡通人物的图片，圈 出其身体和胳膊） Dub the cartoon character. T： This is my body. This is my arm. Please look at my mouth. /ɒ/, /ɒ/, /ɒ/, /bɒ/-/di/, . /ɑː/, /ɑː/, /ɑːm/. Teach the word “body” in high and low voice. Teach the word “arm” in opposite tune. Lead students to chant and do the actions. Body,↗ body,↘ this is the body.↘ Shake my body. （Do the action.） Arm,↗ arm,↘ this is the arm.↘ Wave my arms. （Do the action.） Write down the words “body, arm” on the blackboard. Let students repeat and do the actions. (3)Teach the words “leg, foot”. Show the picture of the cartoon character on the PPT. Circle the cartoon character’s leg and foot.（课件出示：该卡通人物的图片，圈 出其腿和脚）Dub the cartoon character. T: This is my leg. This is my foot. Please look at my mouth. /e/, /e/, /e/, /eg/, /leg/. /ʊ/, /ʊ/, /ʊ/, /ʊt/, /fʊt/. Teach the word “leg” by jumping and saying. Teach the word “foot” by pointing and saying. Lead students to chant and do the actions. Leg,↗ leg,↘ this is the leg.↘ Shake your legs. （Do the action.） Foot,↗ foot,↘ this is the foot.↘ Stamp your foot. （Do the action.） Write down the words “leg, foot” on the blackboard. 2. Listen and number. (1)Show the picture of “Let’s learn” on the PPT. （课件出示: 教材 P28 Let’s learn 板块的图片） T: Look, who are they? Ss: … T: Yes, they are Mike and Sarah. They are making a puppet. Now, please listen and number the words. Play the recording of the listening exercise. （课件出示：教材 P28 Let’s learn 板块补充听力材料的音频） Ask students to listen and number the words. （2）Play the recording again. Show the listening material. Ask students to read after the recording and act it out in pairs. Teaching purpose 将 Let’s learn板块的文 本内容巧妙地转化为听力练 习，训练学生的听音能力， 以给单词排序的形式，充分 调动学生的听觉和视觉，让 学生可以更好地学习、理解 词汇。 107 Step 3: Practice 1. Words game. （游戏说明：学生从以下礼物中选择一个，教师点击礼物后出现一个单词， 学生读出相应单词就可以得到该礼物。） 2. Make a puppet. Take out some parts of a puppet on the desk. T: Look! I have a puppet. But the parts of the puppet are mixed and I can’t play with it. Can you help me put them together? Invite some students to make a puppet and introduce the parts of the puppet with the sentence structure “This is the…” 3. Guessing game. Show some pictures on the PPT. （课件出示：猴子、大象和小猫的身 体部位图片） Ask students to guess the animals. Students guess the animals, then introduce the pictures with the sentence structure “This is the…” Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Let’s do. (1)Play the cartoon of “Let’s do”.（课件出示：教材 P28 Let’s do 板块的视频） Let students get the meaning of it. Help students understand the meanings of the words “clap, wave, shake, stamp” by body language. (2) Play the cartoon again. Lead students to do the actions after it. Then ask students to do the actions according to the instructions. Invite some students to give the instructions, and the others do the actions. Let students practice in groups and show it to the class. 2. Let’s sing. Play the video of the song—Teddy bear. （课件出示：歌曲《Teddy bear》的视频） Ask students to create their own songs according to the example. Teaching purpose 通过单词游戏“会飞的 礼物”对所学词汇进行操练， 增加学习的趣味性，有助于 活跃课堂气氛。 Teaching purpose 学生帮教师完成木偶的 重组并介绍木偶，培养学生 的动手和动口能力，在游戏 中增强学生的自信心。通过 猜谜游戏，培养学生积极动 脑思考的能力，提高学生的 学习积极性。 Teaching purpose 通过游戏，创设情境， 让学生在真实愉快的气氛中 操练单词和表示指令的句 子。鼓励学生大胆创编歌曲， 激发他们的创作欲望，培养 他们的创作才能。 … ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Introduce your toy doll to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1游戏教学贯穿课堂始终，通过单词卡片、大小声、唱反调、会飞的礼物等方式操练单词，寓教于乐，帮 助学生较好较快地掌握新知。 2采用各种形式调动学生的学习积极性，吸引学生注意力，让他们全身心地投入到学习中，并让学生体会 学习带来的成就感，增强学生的自信心。 3基于本课时的重点内容设计教学情境，注意话题的延续性和整体性。 4鼓励学生大胆创编歌曲，开放性的练习激发了学生的创作欲望，并拓展了学生的发散性思维。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to listen, speak and read the new words “head, hand, body, arm, leg, foot”. · Be able to understand the meanings of the sentences with the help of the pictures, PPT and the teacher. · Be able to use the sentence structure “This is the…” properly in situations. Let’s do ·Be able to understand and sing the song with the help of the pictures, the actions and the recording. ·Be able to do the corresponding actions according to the instructions or say the corresponding sentences according to the actions. ▶Teaching Priorities 109 ·Be able to listen， speak and read the new words “head, hand, body, arm, leg, foot”. ·Be able to use the sentence structure “This is the…” properly in situations. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to distinguish the pronunciation of “head” and “hand”. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Revision. (1) Ask students to act out the dialogue of “Let’s talk” on page 27. (2) Play the video of “Let’s do” on page 25. 3. Lead-in. Play the video of the song. 1. Greetings. 2. Act out the dialogue. Do the actions according to the video together. 3. Enjoy the song. Through the TPR activity, help students review the old knowledge in a relaxing atmosphere. Play the video of the song and create a good English learning atmosphere. Prepare for the new lesson. Presentation 1. Teach the new words. Show the cartoon character on the PPT and dub it. Teach the words in different ways. Lead students to chant and do the actions. Look at the cartoon character. Learn the words in different ways. Chant and do the actions. Lead in the new lesson properly with the cartoon character. Teach the words and the sentences in different ways. Strengthen Students’ understanding and memory of the new knowledge through the chant. 2. Listen and number. Show the picture of “Let’s learn”. Play the recording and show the listening material. Look at the picture carefully. Listen to the recording and number the words. Then read after the recording and act it out in pairs. Train Students’ listening skills. Let students number the words according to the recording to help students master the words better. 111 （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Words game. Click the “present” and ask students to say out the words. Play the game to practice the words. Train Students’ ability of practice and speaking. Practice the words and the sentence structure “This is the…” Enhance Students’ confidence. 2. Make a puppet. Try to make a puppet, then introduce the parts of the puppet. 3. Guessing game. Show some pictures on the PPT. Look at the pictures on the PPT. Guess the animals. Then introduce the pictures. Consolidation & Extension 1. Let’s do. (1) Play the cartoon of “Let’s do”. Help students understand the meanings of the words “clap, wave, shake, stamp”. (2) Play the cartoon again. Lead students to do the actions after it. (1) Watch the cartoon and get the meaning of it. (2) Do the actions according to the instructions. Practice in groups and show it to the class. Create a natural and real situation. Help students use the words and the sentences reasonably. Stimulate Students’ creative desire and cultivate their creative ability.2. Let’s sing. Play the video of the song. Enjoy the song and create their own songs according to the example. Homework 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Introduce your toy doll to your family. 3. Do the exercises. The sixth period(第六课时) Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Start to read ·能够找出并能听、说、读、写图片中的字母 ·能够听、说、认读表示五官和身体部位的单词，并数出对应的单词个数 Let’s check ·能够根据图片信息预测听力考查点，并有意识地去听录音，完成排序 ·能够观察图片，朗读单词并完成配对练习 Let’s sing ·能够理解、跟唱歌曲，并能创编新的歌曲 ▶教学重点 1 能听、说、认读本单元与五官及身体部位有关的单词。 2能够独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习。 ▶教学难点 能够在日常生活中自然地运用本单元句型进行交际。 ▶教学准备 1. 预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、小礼物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s sing. Lead students to sing the chant with the melody of Two tigers. （课 件出示：歌曲《两只老虎》的旋律） 3. Revision. T: Boys and girls, Let’s play the game “I say, you do”. Are you ready? Let’s go! Clap your hands! Wave your arms! Shake your body! Stamp your foot! Touch your nose! Touch your ear! Open your eyes! … Step 2: Presentation 1. Turn and turn. Teaching purpose 以歌曲热身，活跃课堂 氛围。复习与五官、身体部 位有关的单词和指令性用 语，调动学生多种感官参与， 激发学生的学习兴趣。 Teaching purpose 通过转盘游戏和创编对 话的活动，对本单元的重点 单词和句型进行检测和复 习，引导学生迅速激活之前 所学的知识，增强学习趣味 性的同时也能为后面的学习 环节做铺垫。 113 Show the turntable with the pictures of body parts and facial features on the PPT. （课件出示：转盘图） Turn the turntable and ask students to say the corresponding words. 2. Make a dialogue. Let students make a dialogue. Give an example first. Then ask students to practice in pairs and share it with the class. 3. Find and say. Let students look at the picture of “Find and say” carefully. （课件出示：教材 P29 Find and say 的图片） T: Wow! Look! There are so many candies. What else can you see? Ss: Letters! T: Great! What letter can you see? S1: I see a big E. S2: I see a big F. … T: Now, please circle all the letters. How many letters can you see? How many big/small letters? Ss: … 4. Read and count. (1) Show the picture of the clown on the PPT. （课件出示：教材 P29 Read and count 的小丑图）Lead students to describe the clown with the sentence structure “This is the arm/ear/hand…” (2) Show the words on the clown. （课件出示：小丑身体栏中的单词） Invite some students to read the words one by one. Let students point to the corresponding body parts while reading the words. (3) Let students count the words. Check the answers on the PPT. (课件出示: 教材 P29 Read and count 的答案) Step 3: Practice 1. Listen and number. (1)Let students look at the pictures of “Listen and number” by themselves. （课件出示：教材 P30 Listen and number 的图片）Lead them to predict the content of every picture. Remind students to pay attention to the key information. (2) Play the recording. （课件出示:教材 P30 Listen and number 的 音频）Let students listen to the recording and try to number the pictures. Teaching purpose 引导学生观察图片，寻 找字母并数出找到的字母的 个数，培养学生的观察能力。 Teaching purpose 让学生观察图片，运用 所学知识描述图片，再让学 生朗读单词并数出对应的单 词数量，注重对学生学习方 法的指导。 Teaching purpose 在听力练习之前，预留 时间让学生对所听内容进行 预测，对学生进行有效的听 力技巧指导。 (3) Check the answers together. Then ask students to read the listening material. （课件出示：教材 P30 Listen and number 的听力材 料及答案） 2. Look and match. (1) Show the picture of “Look and match” on the PPT. （课件出 示：教材 P30 Look and match 的图片） Let students describe what they see. T: Who are they? What are they doing? What can you see? (2) Invite some students to read the words one by one. Then ask students to read the words group by group. (3) Let students match the words to the pictures. Then check the answers.（课件出示：教材 P30 Look and match 的答案） Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let’s sing. （1）Play the cartoon for the first time. （课件出示：教材 P30 Let’ s sing 板块的视频） Let students get the meaning of it. Help students understand the meanings of the words “shoulders, knees, toes” by body language. （2）Play the cartoon again. (出示课件) Let students learn to sing and do the actions after the cartoon. Then ask students to practice the song in groups and show it to the class. （3）Create your own song. Encourage students to create their own songs. Give an example. T: Now, please create your own song. Let students sing their own songs. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 通过配对练习，巩固所 学单词，帮助学生在日常生 活中熟练使用所学知识。 Teaching purpose 教唱快乐且节奏感强的 歌曲，复习单词的同时还能 活跃课堂气氛，通过音乐、 韵律和动作来让学生感受英 语的节奏美。鼓励学生运用 所学知识对歌曲进行大胆创 编，增强学生学习英语的自 信心。通过音乐和英语的结 合，培养学生的综合能力和 创造力。 115 ▶作业设计 1. Read the key words. 2. Sing your own song to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1基于单元整体教学，将重点单词和句型较好地进行了整合，融入游戏、歌曲等多种活动中。 2注重对学生学习方法的指导，包括听的指导、说的指导和读的指导。 3充分利用了多媒体资源辅助教学，利用课件为学生创设一定的情境，让学生能够在情境中自然地会话。 4 鼓 励 学 生 创 编 歌 曲 ， 增 强 了 学 生 的 自 信 心 ， 培 养 了 学 生 的 综 合 能 力 和 创 造 力 。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Start to read ·Be able to find as well as listen, speak, read and write the letters in the picture. ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words of this unit and count the words. Let’s check ·Be able to predict the examination points according to the pictures, listen to the recording consciously and number the pictures. ·Be able to observe the pictures, read the words and finish the task of matching. Let’s sing ·Be able to understand and sing the song, and make a new song. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words of this unit. ·Be able to finish the exercises of “Let’s check” independently. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structures of this unit properly in daily life. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s sing. Lead students to sing the chant with the melody of Two tigers. 3. Revision. Play the game “I say, you do” with students. Give instructions. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the chant. 3. Play the game. Do the actions according to the instructions. Activate the learning atmosphere. Review the words and the sentences. Cultivate Students’ interest in learning. Presentation 1. Turn and turn. Show the turntable with the pictures of body parts and facial features. Turn the turntable. Say the corresponding words according to the turntable. Create a natural real situation to review and practice the key words and sentence structures of this unit. Prepare for the following study. 2. Make a dialogue. Let students make a dialogue. Give an example first. Then ask students to practice in pairs and share it with the class. Try to make a dialogue. Practice the dialogue in pairs and share it with the class. 3. Find and say. Show the picture and ask some questions. Look at the picture carefully. Try to find the letters and count the letters. Cultivate Students’ observation ability by observing the picture. 4. Read and count. (1) Show the clown on the PPT. (2) Show the words on the clown. (3) Check the answers. (1) Describe the clown with the sentence structure “This is the arm/ear/hand…” (2) Read the words one by one. (3) Count the words and check the answers. Lead students to describe the picture and count the words. Provide guidance on Students’ learning methods. 117 （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Listen and number. (1) Show the pictures. Remind students to pay attention to the key information. (2) Play the recording. (3) Check the answers. (1) Look at the pictures carefully. Predict the content of every picture. (2) Listen to the recording and try to number the pictures. (3) Check the answers with the teacher. Then read the listening material. Train Students’ ability of listening. Help students improve listening skills. 2. Look and match. (1) Show the picture and ask some questions. (2) Invite some students to read the words. (3) Let students match the words to the pictures. Then check the answers. (1) Look at the picture and describe what they see. (2) Read the words one by one and then group by group. (3) Match the words to the pictures. Check the answers. Consolidate the key words with the pictures. Help students use the words in their real life properly. Consolidation & Extension Let’s sing. Play the cartoon. Let students practice in groups and create a new song. (1) Watch the cartoon and get the meaning of it. (2) Sing the song and do the actions after the cartoon. Practice in groups and show it to the class. (3) Create their own songs, then sing the songs. Review the words and activate the atmosphere through the song. Enhance students’ confidence. Cultivate Students’ comprehensive ability and creativity. Homework 1. Read the key words. 2. Sing your own song to your family. 3. Do the exercises. Recycle 1 教材分析 本单元是复习巩固单元，以巩固和操练 1~3 单元的核心句型和词汇为主。运用情境教学， 将所学句型和词汇串联起来，让学生在创设的真实情景中复习 1~3 单元的核心知识。本单元的 内容由三部分组成，第一部分提供的是一个阅读任务，通过一个幽默故事，帮助学生综合复习 1~3 单元的核心句型；第二部分通过听、画、读的活动以及梯子和蛇的游戏帮助学生复习 1~3 单 元所学字母、词汇和句型；第三部分重点复习所学字母和语音。 教学目标 知识与能力目标: 句型 ·能听懂、会说句型“Hello!/Hi!”“Morning./Good morning./Good afternoon.”“—How are you?—I’m fine.” “Bye.” “—What’s your name? —My name is…/I’m…”“This is…”“—Nice to meet you. —Nice to meet you, too.” 词汇 ·文具： ruler, eraser, pencil, crayon, bag, pen, pencil box, book ·颜色： red, yellow, green, blue, black, brown, white, orange ·身体部位： face, ear, eye, nose, mouth, arm, hand, head, body, leg, foot 语音 ·字母 Aa-Ii 及其在单词中的发音 能力目标： ·学生能在实际情景中灵活运用语言进行问候和交友 ·巩固复习 1~3 单元有关文具、身体部位和颜色的词汇 ·巩固复习 1~3 单元所学的字母，并能说出它们对应的发音 情感态度､文化意识､学习策略目标: ·建立友好的朋友关系，懂礼貌，讲文明 ·注意单词音、义、形之间的联系，整体学习单词 课时安排 第一课时： Read aloud & Listen and colour & Look and tick(√) 第二课时： Go up the ladders. Go down the snakes & Match, write and read aloud & Sing a song 119 The first period(第一课时) Read aloud & Listen and colour & Look and tick (√) ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Read aloud ·复习巩固 1~3 单元所学的词汇和句型 ·能够在理解故事的基础上表演故事 Listen and colour & Look and tick(√) ·复习有关颜色和身体部位的单词 ·能够独立完成听力练习 ▶教学重点 复习巩固 1~3 单元所学的词汇和句型。 ▶教学难点 能够熟练运用 1~3 单元的核心句型在所创设的真实情境中自然得体地进行会话。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song—Colour song.（出示课件） Students sing the song together. 3. Let’s do. T: Hey, boys and girls. Let’s play the game “I say, you do”. Ready? Go! Close your eyes! Open your mouth! Touch your head! Wave your arms! … OK. Once again. This time you should do it faster. Stamp your foot! … Step 2: Presentation 1. Look and say. Show the main scene of Units 1~3. (课件出示：Units 1~3 的主情景 图) Let students make dialogues according to the pictures. 2. Learn the story. (1)Show the pictures of “Read aloud”. (课件出示:教材 P32 Read aloud 的图片) Lead students to look at the five pictures and predict the main idea of the story. T: We have so many friends. Look! Who are they? Teaching purpose 歌曲热身，复习有关颜 色的单词。通过游戏“我说 你做”复习有关身体部位的 单词，唤醒旧知，活跃课堂 氛围，为后面的复习环节做 铺垫。 Teaching purpose 通过看图说话，复习前 面三个单元的核心句型。 Teaching purpose 教师引导学生观察图 片，预测故事内容，然后通 过一系列问题，引导学生理 解故事内容。 (2)Play the cartoon for the first time. (课件出示：教材 P32 Read aloud 的视频) Help students understand the phrases “white hands, brown arms” by Picture 3 and get the main idea of the story.T: (Point to Picture 3.) Look at Zoom/Zip. What is he/she saying? Ss: … T: Is this Zoom?/Is this Zip? Ss: No. This is Mike./This is John. Help students get more details to understand the story better. 3. Read and act. (1)Play the cartoon again. Ask students to read after the recording. Let students practice the story and do a dubbing show. (2)Let students wear the headdresses to act out the story. Step 3: Post-learning 1. Play the game—Whack-a-mole. Play the game to review the words about colours with students. (出 示课件) 2. Play the game—Pass the ball. Let students choose the cartoon characters they like and prepare the hand-made headdresses, then play the game. T: Let’s make some new friends. Listen to the music. When it stops, the one who gets the ball will act for us! Who is the lucky one? Make a model: Ss: Good morning! Good morning! Who are you? S1: I’m/My name is XXX. Ss: Hello! Hello! Nice to meet you! S1: Hello! Hello! Nice to meet you, too! (游戏说明:教师让学生提前准备好自己想扮演的角色的头饰，可以是课 本上的人物，也可以是学生喜爱的卡通人物。教师放音乐传球，当音乐一停， 谁拿到小球就带上自制的头饰向同学们介绍自己并打招呼。) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Look and sing. Show the picture on page 33 on the PPT. (出示课件) Lead students to say the colours in order. Then sing the adapted song—Colour song. T: Look at this beautiful picture. What colours can you see? Ss: … T: Great! Let’s sing the new Colour song. 2. Listen and colour. Let students look at the picture carefully. Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读。通过配音和角色扮演， 锻炼学生的口语能力。 Teaching purpose 通过打地鼠和传球游 戏，复习有关颜色的单词及 问候的句型，增强学生学习 的趣味性，增加学生的语言 输出，为后面的听音练习做 好铺垫。 Teaching purpose 通过让学生说出颜色单 词和改编歌曲，进一步巩固 颜色单词。完成听力任务之 前，通过提问让学生对所听 内容进行熟悉和预测，注重 对学生听力技巧的指导。 121 T: What are they doing? They are enjoying the party! Now, please help the kids to make them more beautiful. Play the recording. (课 件出示：教材 P33 Listen and colour 的音频) Let students pay attention to the key information “Miss, Mr, green, blue, red” and colour the picture. Show the listening material. (课件出示：教材 P33 Listen and colour 的听力材料) Check the answers. 3. Look and tick. Let students look at the picture on page 33 carefully and tick what they see. Check the answers on the PPT. (课件出示：教材 P33 Look and tick 的答案) ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Retell the story. 2. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 注重对学生的引导，将课堂的主动权更多地留给学生，体现了以学生为本的教学理念。 2. 让学生自主扮演自己喜欢的卡通人物，注重对学生创新能力和发散性思维的培养。 3. 角色扮演、打地鼠游戏、看图说话和自编歌曲等多种形式充分调动了学生的学习积极性，使学生在不 知不觉中完成复习任务，达到了较好的教学效果。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Read aloud ·Review and consolidate the vocabulary and the sentence structures of Units 1~3. ·Be able to understand the story and act it out. Listen and colour & Look and tick(√) ·Review the words about colours and body parts. ·Be able to finish the listening exercise independently. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Review and consolidate the vocabulary and the sentence structures of Units 1~3. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the key sentence structures properly and skillfully in real situations. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song—Colour song. 3. Let’s do. Give instructions. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—Colour song. 3. Do the actions according to the Teacher’s instructions. Stimulate Students’ interest in learning and review the knowledge learnt before. Prepare for the following step. Presentation 1. Look and say. Show the main scene of Units 1~3. Let students make dialogues according to the pictures. Try to make dialogues according to the pictures. Review and consolidate the key sentence structures of Units 1~3. 2. Learn the story. (1)Show the pictures of “Read aloud”. Lead students to predict the main idea of the story. (2)Play the cartoon. Ask some questions to help students get more details of the story. (1)Look at the pictures and predict the main idea. (2)Watch the cartoon and answer the questions. Lead students to predict the main idea of the story by observing the pictures. Help students understand the story better with the questions. 123 （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 3. Read and act. Play the recording. Watch the video. Read after the recording. Practice the story and do a dubbing show. Wear the headdresses to act out the story. Make sure that students can read the story correctly and fluently. Practice 1. Play the game—Whack-a-mole. Show some words about colours on the PPT. Play the game to review the words. Review the words and the sentence structures. Cultivate Students’ interest in learning. Improve Students’ ability of language output. Prepare for the following listening exercise. 2. Play the game—Pass the ball. Let students choose the cartoon characters they like and prepare the headdresses. Pass the ball. The student who gets the ball wears the headdress to make a self-introduction and greet other students. Consolidation & Extension 1. Look and sing. Show the picture on page 33 on the PPT. Look at the picture and say the colours in order. Then sing the song. Further consolidate the words about colours through saying the words in order and singing the new song. Let students predict the content of the picture with questions before listening. Cultivate Students’ learning methods. 2. Listen and colour. Play the recording. Show the listening material and check the answers. Listen to the recording and colour the picture. Check the answers. 3. Look and tick. Check the answers. Look at the picture carefully and tick the rightanswers. Check the answers. Homework 1. Retell the story. 2. Do the exercises. The second period(第二课时) Go up the ladders. Go down the snakes & Match, write and read aloud & Sing a song ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Go up the ladders. Go down the snakes ·能够准确、快速地认读前三个单元的词汇 ·能够在真实的语境中灵活运用重点句型“Hello!Hi!”“This is…”“—How are you? —I’m fine.”“—Nice to meet you. —Nice to meet you, too.”“Goodbye!/Bye.” Match, write and read aloud & Sing a song ·能够辨认字母的大小写形式并能掌握其正确的书写格式 ·能够理解、跟唱歌曲，并能创编新歌曲 ▶教学重点 1复习巩固有关文具、颜色、身体部位的单词，要求能够听、说、认读。 2能够在情景中恰当运用重点句型问候他人和做自我介绍。 ▶教学难点 能够辨认字母的大小写形式并能掌握其正确的书写格式。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、书包、单词卡片、文具等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song—Head and shoulders, knees and toes. (出示课件) 3. Revision T: I have a ruler! Ss: (Show the rulers.) Me too! T: I have a pen! Ss: (Show the pens.) Me too! … T: You’re great! Now, Let’s chant together. Teaching purpose 通过唱歌活跃课堂气 氛，让学生更快地进入英语 学习的氛围中。复习与身体 部位、文具有关的单词和所 学字母，为后面的学习做好 铺垫。 125 Step 2: Presentation 1. Play a game—Brainstorm. Let students try to say more words or letters according to the category prompt. 2. Play a game—Whisper. Divide students into several groups. Let them pass on different sentences in a low voice. Students pass on the sentences one by one in groups. Ask the last student to share it with the class. Reward the fastest group. Sentences are like these: 3. Let’s guess. Show a schoolbag to students. There are some word cards of the body parts, some stationery and some books in it. Let students guess the things and their colours. T: What’s in my bag? What’s this? What colour is it? 4. Go up the ladders. Go down the snakes. Ask students to work in pairs and play the game “Go up the ladders. Go down the snakes.” Lead students to say the words or the sentences according to the pictures. （游戏说明：学生两人一组掷骰子，每人每次掷一次，完成看图说话活 动，答错的学生停掷一次。遇到梯子直接晋级到梯子顶端的格子内，完成相 Teaching purpose 通过“头脑风暴”游戏， 让学生在游戏和竞争中复习 单词。加深学生对单词的记 忆，同时培养学生的竞争意 识，调动学生学习的积极性。 Teaching purpose 将学生分为若干小组进 行组内传话游戏，复习学过 的句型。让学生在紧张的氛 围中加强对句型的记忆，同 时培养其合作竞争意识。 Teaching purpose 通过猜一猜的活动和 “梯子和蛇”的游戏，复习 有关文具、颜色、身体部位 的单词以及前三个单元所学 的句型和字母，帮助学生在 真实的语境中灵活运用所学 语言。 应活动；遇到蛇则后退到蛇尾所在的格子，完成相应活动。看到实物图片时 说单词，说出完整句子更好；看到情景图片时说句子，答案开放，适合该场 景的句子均算通关；看到字母时根据图片要求完成说或写的活动。谁能最快 到达终点就是赢家。） Step 3: Practice 1. Draw a letter house. Show the picture on page 6 on the PPT. (课件出示:教材 P6 Let’s find out 板块的图片) T: Look! There are so many hidden letters. Can you draw your own letter house?Let students draw their own letter houses and show them to the class to find the hidden letters together. 2. Match, write and read aloud. Let students look at the pictures and the letters on page 35 carefully. (出示课件) Lead students to match the capital letters to the lowercase letters. Then let them write these letters in their books according to the correct stroke order and writing form. Ask students to read the letters together. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Sing a song. (1)Play the cartoon of the song for the first time. （课件出示： 教材 P35 Sing a song 的视频） Help students get the meaning of it. T: Who are they? What are they doing? Ss: … (2)Play the cartoon again. (出示课件) Lead students to learn to sing the song and clap their hands after the recording. Let them practice the song in groups. Then ask them to show it to the class. (3)Create your own songs. Encourage students to create their own songs. Give an example. T: Now, please create your own songs. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 让学生参照教材 P6 的 图片，自由创作一幅“字母 屋”，培养学生的想象力和创 造力，同时提升学生区分字 母大小写的能力。 Teaching purpose 通过打着节拍学唱歌 曲，培养学生的节奏感。通 过创编歌曲，培养学生的创 造力和灵活运用语言的能 力。 127 ▶作业设计 1. Sing the song How are you? to your family. 2. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1活动设计环环相扣、层层递进，由单词到句型，进行了较全面的复习。 2实施单元整体教学，把握单元教学目标的整体性，挖掘单元教学内容的整体性，设计单元教学过程的整 体性，充分体现新课程的教学理念。 3 不拘泥于教材文本内容，鼓励学生结合所学知识进行创作，注重培养学生的创新精神。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Go up the ladders. Go down the snakes. ·Be able to recognize and read the words of Units 1~3 quickly and correctly. ·Be able to use the key sentence structures of Units 1~3 flexibly in real situations. Match, write and read aloud & Sing a song ·Be able to distinguish between the capital letters and the lowercase letters and master their correct writing forms. ·Be able to understand and sing the song, and make a new song.. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Review and consolidate the words of Units 1~3. ·Be able to use the sentence structures properly in situations to greet others and make a self-introduction. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to distinguish between the capital letters and the lowercase letters and master their correct writing forms. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song. 3. Revision. Talk to students and chant with them. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song. 3. Talk with the teacher and do the actions. Chant together. Stimulate Students’ interest in learning. Review the words and the letters. Prepare for the following step. Presentation 1. Play a game—Brainstorm. Let students try to say more words or letters according to the category prompt. Try to say more words or letters according to the category prompt. Review and consolidate the words and the letters. Cultivate Students’ sense of competition and elevate Students’ learning initiative. 2. Play a game—Whisper. Divide students into several groups. Let them pass on different sentences in a low voice in groups. Try to pass on different sentences in a low voice in groups. The last student shares it with the class. Review and consolidate the sentence structures. Cultivate Students’ sense of cooperation and competition. 3. Let’s guess. Show a schoolbag with many things in it. Let students guess the things and their colours. Guess the things and their colours in the schoolbag. Review and consolidate the words, the sentences and the letters. Help students use the language flexibly in real situations. 4. Go up the ladders. Go down the snakes. Work in pairs and play the game. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes 129 Practice 1. Draw a letter house. Show the picture on page 6 on the PPT. Let students imitate it and draw their own letter houses. Try to draw their own letter houses, then show them to the class to find the hidden letters together. Cultivate Students’ imagination and creativity. Help students distinguish between the capital letters and the lowercase letters.2. Match, write and read aloud. Let students look at the pictures and the letters carefully. Look at the pictures and the letters carefully. Match and write the letters in their books. Read the letters together. Consolidation & Extension Sing a song. (1)Play the cartoon. Help students get the meaning of the song. (2)Play the cartoon again. Lead students to learn to sing the song. (3)Create your own songs. Show an example on the PPT. Ask students to create their own songs. (1)Watch the cartoon and get the meaning of it. (2)Sing the song and clap hands. Practice the song in groups and show it to the class. (3)Create new songs according to the example. Learn to sing the song in rhythm to cultivate Students’ sense of rhythm. Cultivate Students’ creativity and the ability to use the language flexibly. Homework 1. Sing the song How are you? to your family. 2. Do the exercises. Unit 4 We love animals 教材分析 本单元学习的主题是动物。教学内容主要是围绕着主线人物询问近处或远处不认识的动物 （或其他事物）来展开的。教学重点是能够听懂、会说核心句型“—What’s this/ that? — It’s a…”“Cool! I like it.”；能够听、说、认读单词“duck, pig, cat, bear, dog, elephant, monkey, bird, tiger, panda, zoo”。 教学目标 知识目标： 句型 ·能听懂、会说句型“—What’s this/ that? —It’s a…”“Cool! I like it.” 词汇 ·能听、说、认读单词“duck, pig, cat, bear, dog, elephant, monkey, bird, tiger, panda, zoo” 字母与语音 ·能正确听、说、读、写字母 Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn 并知道其在单词中的发音 能力目标： ·能够在图片、实物或情境的帮助下运用句型“—What’s this/that? —It’s a…”询问并 回答动物的名称 ·能够在情境中运用句型“Cool! I like it.”表达赞美或欣赏 ·听到字母能说出它对应的发音 情感态度、文化意识、学习策略目标： ·培养学生热爱动物、保护动物的意识 ·了解英语中部分动物声音的拟声词 ·能够建立单词音、义、形之间的联系，整体学习单词 课时安排 第一课时: Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play 第二课时: Part A Let’s learn & Let’s chant 第三课时: Part A Letters and sounds 第四课时: Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play 第五课时: Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do 第六课时: Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing 131 The first period(第一课时) Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够理解对话大意，能够用正确的语音、语调朗读对话 ·能够在图片和教师的帮助下，在语境中运用句型“—What’s this? —It’s a…”来交 流图片上的各种动物信息 Let’s play ·能够通过声音与意义相结合的游戏活动，巩固记忆动物单词的音和义以及句型“—What’s this? —It’s a…” ▶教学重点 1. 能够理解对话大意，能够用正确的语音、语调朗读对话。 2. 能够听懂、会说句子“—What’s this? —It’s a duck/ dog/ bear.”。 ▶教学难点 能够在实际情境中正确运用句型“—What’s this? —It’s a…”询问并回答动物的名称。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰、教学实物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hello, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Miss/ Mr… 2. Enjoy the song—Old MacDonald.（课件出示：教材 P44 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲） 3. Listen and do. T: Show me your pencil/ ruler/ crayon… Students show the stationery according to the teacher’s instructions. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new sentence structures and words. (1) Teach the new sentence structure “It’s a…” The teacher shows a pen to students. T: What’s this? It’s a… Ss: Pen. T: Great! It’s a pen. Follow me: It’s a pen. The teacher writes down the sentence structure “It’s a…” on the blackboard. Teaching purpose 本课的主题是动物，在 这里渗透本单元的主题歌 《Old MacDonald》。这首歌 曲虽然没有学过，但是很多 学生早就听过，容易引起学 生的共鸣，激发学生的兴趣。 复习第一单元的文具类单 词，为新授句型“It’s a…” 做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 借助第一单元学过的文 具类单词，引出本课要学的 句型“It’s a…”。以旧引新， 过渡自然，学生很容易接受 并掌握。 Then the teacher shows other stationery to help students practice the new sentence structure “It’s a…” Ss: It’s a pencil/ ruler/ crayon/… (2) Teach the new sentence structure “What’s this?” and the word “dog”. T: (Show a crayon.) What’s this? Ss: It’s a crayon. T: Good! Follow me: What’s this? The teacher writes down the sentence “What’s this?” on the blackboard. T: Now, you ask, I answer. Ss: What’s this? T: It’s a pencil/ ruler/ crayon/… Show the picture of a dog on the PPT.（出示课件） T: What’s this? Ss: 狗。 T: Yes. It’s a dog. The teacher writes down the word “dog” on the blackboard. T: Woof, woof! It’s a dog. Read after me. /d/-/ʌ/-/g/, dog, ↗ dog.↘ Students read the word “dog” and the sentence “It’s a dog.” after the teacher. (3) Teach the word “duck”. The teacher plays the recording of the sound that a duck makes. （出示课件） T: Listen! What’s this? A dog? Ss: No. T: (Show the picture of a duck.) A duck? Ss: Yes! The teacher writes down the word “duck” on the blackboard. T: Quack, quack! It’s a duck. Read after me. /d/-/ʌ/-/k/, duck, ↗ duck.↘ Students read the word “duck” and the sentence “It’s a duck.” after the teacher. (4) Teach the word “bear”. The teacher shows a box to students. Let students guess what’s in the box. T: Look, I have a box. What’s in the box? You can touch it. Ss: … T: (Take out the toy bear.) What’s this? It’s a bear. Read after me. /b/-/eə(r)/, bear,↗bear.↘ The teacher writes down the word “bear” on the blackboard. Teaching purpose 在学习新句型的过程 中，自然引出新单词“dog”， 过渡自然。音与形相结合的 学习方式，更有利于学生对 新知识的掌握。 Teaching purpose 通过猜一猜、摸一摸的 方式，引出新单词“bear”。 再次变换形式 ,让学生始终 保持浓厚的学习兴趣。 Teaching purpose 通过听鸭子的叫声，引 出新单词“duck”。变换不同 的学习形式，激发学生的学 习兴趣。 133 Students read the word “bear” and the sentence “It’s a bear.” after the teacher. 2. Look and say. (1) Show the first picture of “Let’s talk”. T: Look! Wu Yifan and Mike! What are they doing? They are playing games in the classroom. Wu Yifan is making animals with his hands. He is making animals on the wall. What’s this on the wall? Ss: It’s a duck. T: Good! (2) Show the second picture of “Let’s talk”. T: Look, what’s this? Who wants to be Wu Yifan? S1: What’s this? Ss: It’s a dog. T: Cool! (3) Show the third picture of “Let’s talk”. T: Look, what are they talking about? Please work in pairs. One acts Wu Yifan. The other one acts Mike. Let students work in pairs, and then have a show. The teacher gives the assessment at last. (4) Show the last picture of “Let’s talk”.（课件出示：教材 P38 Let’s talk 板块的第四幅图） T: Who is that? Ss: Zoom! T: Oh, it’s Zoom. Teaching purpose 在学习课文对话这一环 节，从提供语言支架，到逐 步去掉支架，让学生自主学 习 ,并操练句型。以回答问 题、自由发挥、表演等多种 形式，在降低学习难度的同 时，培养学生的观察能力和 逻辑思维能力。 Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读。引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读对话，并能 在小组中进行角色扮演。进 一步加深学生对对话的理 解，以及对新学单词和句型 3. Read and act. (1) The teacher plays the cartoon.（课件出示：教材 P38 Let’s talk 板块的动画）Ask students to watch the cartoon and read after it. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the dialogue by themselves. (3) Let students practice the dialogue in pairs, and then wear the headdresses to act out the dialogue in class. Step 3: Practice 1. Make a chant. The teacher gives an example to students. Then let students make a chant together. 2. Let’s play. (1) Show the pictures of “duck, dog, bear” one by one.（出示 课件） Do the hand shadows and imitate the sounds of the three animals. Let students ask and answer with the sentence structures “—What’s this? —It’s a duck/ dog/ bear.” (2) Pair work. Let students work in pairs to practice the dialogue of “Let’s play”. (3) Show time. Ask one student to come to the front and imitate the sounds of the animals, and the other students guess by saying “It’s a…” S1: Woof! Woof! What’s this? Ss: It’s a dog. … Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. What is on the farm? Show the picture of old MacDonald and his farm on the PPT.（课 件出示：MacDonald 和他的农场）Students can see part of the dog/ duck/ bear in the picture. T:（课件出示：一只狗在吃狗粮） Look! What’s this? Ss: It’s a dog. Teaching purpose 以朗朗上口的 chant 形 式，帮助学生巩固新知，让 学生在韵律中，多回合、多 层次地操练，不断加强对新 知的记忆。 Teaching purpose 通过手影游戏，在一问 一答间，进一步加深学生对 句型和动物单词的理解，同 时让课堂教学充满趣味性。 Teaching purpose 在导入环节，学生聆听 《Old MacDonald》这首歌； 在拓展环节，再次围绕 MacDonald 的农场创设语音 情境，对重点句型进行拓展 操练，首尾照应。让学生找 出隐藏在农场中的动物，能 够极大地调动学生的积极 性。 135 T: Wow, you are so clever! （课件出示：地上有一些鸭子的脚印） What’s this? Ss: It’s a duck. T: （课件出示： 一只熊躲在树洞里，只露出尾巴） Look! What’s this? Ss: It’s a bear. 2. Practice in pairs and show in class. Students practice the sentence structures “—What’s this? — It’s a…” in pairs. S1: (Point to the picture of the dog on the farm.) Look! What’s this? S2: It’s a dog. S1: (Point to the…) Look! What’s this? S2: … The teacher chooses several pairs of students to show their dialogues in class, and gives some stickers to the students who do a good job. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Practice the sentence structures by playing the hand shadow game with your family members. 3. Do the exercises.（见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业） ▶教学反思 1. 教学设计精心巧妙，层层递进，由易到难，易于操作，始终使学生保持浓厚的学习兴趣。 2. 新知的学习尽可能地联系旧知，以旧引新，降低了学生学习的难度，帮助学生更好地理解所学知识。 3. 板书设计配合图片展示，一目了然，重点突出，对课堂教学起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk ·Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue and read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation. ·Be able to use the sentence structures “—What’s this? —It’s a…” to get information of animals in context with the help of the teacher and the pictures. Let’s play ·Be able to consolidate the words “duck, dog, bear” and the sentence structures “—What’s this? ·—It’s a…” through the hand shadow game and other activities. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue and read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation. ·Be able to understand and say the sentences “—What’s this? —It’s a duck/ dog/ bear.” ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structures “—What’s this? —It’s a…” to ask and answer the name of the animals correctly in real situations. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy the song—Old MacDonald. 3. Listen and do. 1. Greetings. 2. Listen to the song. 3. Show the stationery according to the teacher’s instructions. Stimulate students’ interest in learning and lead in the topic of this unit. Review the words about stationery which students have learned. Presentation 1. Teach the new sentence structures and words. (1) Teach the new sentence structure “It’s a…” (2) Teach the new sentence structure “What’s this?” and the word “dog”. (3) Teach the word “duck”. (4) Teach the word “bear”. (1) Learn the new sentence structure “It’s a…” by some stationery. (2) Learn the new sentence structure “What’s this?” and the word “dog”. (3) Learn the word “duck”. (4) Learn the word “bear”. Create a good English learning atmosphere. Lead students to understand and learn the new sentence structures and words through different learning ways. 2. Look and say. Show the pictures of “Let’s talk” one by one and teach the dialogue step by step. Observe the pictures and talk about them with the teacher. Learn the dialogue. Lead students to learn new sentence structures gradually. Reduce the difficulty of learning. And cultivate students’ observation 137 and logical thinking ability. 3. Read and act. Play the cartoon. Read the dialogue after the cartoon and read by themselves. Practice the dialogue in pairs and act it out. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Deepen their understanding of the dialogue. Practice 1. Make a chant. Give an example. Make a chant together. Use the chant to arouse students’ learning interest. Practice the key words and sentence structures by the interesting games. 2. Let’s play. Show the pictures one by one. Do the hand shadows and imitate the sounds. Follow the teacher to ask and answer with the sentence structures “—What’s this? — It’s a duck/ dog/ bear.” Consolidation & Extension 1. What is on the farm? Show some pictures and ask some questions. Look at the pictures and answer the questions. Create the language environment with old MacDonald’s farm to echo with the beginning and arouse students’ great interest in practicing the new sentence structures. 2. Let students work in pairs and show in class. Give some stickers to the students who do a good job. Work in pairs to practice the sentence structures and show in class. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Practice the sentence structures by playing the hand shadow game with your family members. 3. Do the exercises. The second period(第二课时) Part A Let’s learn & Let’s chant ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听、说、认读五个动物单词“pig, bear, cat, duck, dog” ·能够了解这五个动物单词的书写形式 Let’s chant ·能够通过朗读歌谣对动物单词音和义进行巩固操练，并初步感知一些形容词的意义 ·能够利用读音规则拼读新单词 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、认读五个动物单词“pig, bear, cat, duck, dog”。 ▶教学难点 能够了解这五个动物单词的书写形式，并利用读音规则拼读新单词。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、动物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. T: Good morning! Boys and girls! Ss: Good morning! Miss/ Mr… T: S1, how are you? S1: … T: Hello, what’s your name? S2: … … 2. Sharp eyes. The teacher shows the pictures of the tails and footprints of “duck, bear, dog” on the PPT. （课件出示：依次快速出示鸭子、熊、 狗的尾巴和脚印的图片）Students respond to the teacher with the sentence structure “It’s a…” quickly. T: Look at the PPT. What’s this? Ss: It’s a duck/ bear/ dog. 3. Listen and do. T: Show me your pencil/ ruler/ crayon… Students show the stationery according to the teacher’s instructions. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new words. (1) Teach the words “cat, fat”. T: I can make an animal with my hands. Look, what’s this? (The teacher makes a cat with his/ her hands.) Ss: 猫。 T: Yes! It’s a cat. Show a picture of a cat on the PPT.（出示课件） T: /æt/, /kæt/, cat. Follow me: Meow, meow, cat. Ss: Meow, meow, cat. (The teacher checks students’ pronunciation one by one.) T: Look at the cat. It becomes fat.（课件出示：鼠标点击猫的图片， 猫逐渐变胖，图片下方呈现 cat—fat） T: /æt/, cat. /æt/, fat. Fat, fat, fat. Follow me: It’s a fat cat. Ss: It’s a fat cat. T: Now, let’s make a chant. Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 来拉近师生距离，营造愉快 的学习氛围，同时复习关于 打招呼的句型 ,为后面的环 节做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 通过呈现动物的尾巴和 脚印，让学生迅速说出动物 的名称，集中学生的注意力， 营造良好的学习氛围。复习 上节课的单词和句型的同 时，也为本课的学习做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 用手影、动物身体的一 部分、叫声、脚印和简笔画 的方式引出这五个动物单 词，先让学生通过 chant 感 知读音规则，再通过字母替 换，训练学生的自然拼读能 力。通过 TPR教学法，使学 生动口，动手，动眼，动脑， 调动其全身感官，投入英语 学习中来，提高学习效率。 139 Students follow the teacher and repeat the chant. (2) Teach the words “pig, big”. Show a picture of a pig’s tail on the PPT.（出示课件） T: Look, what’s this? A cat? Ss: No. Show a picture of a little pig on the PPT.（出示课件） T: It’s a pig. /ɪg/, pig. Follow me: Oink, oink, pig. Ss: Oink, oink, pig. (The teacher checks students’ pronunciation by the game “High and low voice”.) T: Look at the pig. It becomes big.（课件出示：鼠标点击小猪的图 片，猪逐渐变大，图片下方呈现 pig—big） T: /ɪg/, pig. /ɪg/, big. Big, big, big. Follow me: It’s a big pig. Ss: It’s a big pig. T: Now, let’s make a chant. Students follow the teacher and repeat the chant. (3) Teach the words “dog, log”. Play the recording of the sound that a dog makes.（出示课件） T: Listen! What’s this? Ss: It’s a dog. Show a picture of a dog on the PPT.（出示课件） T: Yes, it’s a dog. /d/-/ɒ/-/g/, dog. Follow me: Woof, woof, dog. Ss: Woof, woof, dog. （课件出示：鼠标点击小狗的图片，小狗下方出现一根圆木，图片下方 呈现 dog—log） T: Change the first letter “d” of the word “dog” into “l”. Who can read the new word? S1: Log. T: Good! A sticker for you. It’s a log. /ɒ/-/g/, log. Log, log, log. Read after me: The dog is on the log. Ss: The dog is on the log. (4) Teach the words “duck, truck”. Show the footprint of a duck on the PPT. (出示课件) T: What’s this? Ss: It’s a duck. Show a picture of a duck on the PPT.（出示课件） T: Great. Follow me: /ʌk/, /ʌk/, duck. Ss: /ʌk/, /ʌk/, duck. （课件出示：鼠标点击鸭子的图片，鸭子出现在一辆货车里，图片下方 呈现 duck—truck） T: Who can read it? (The teacher points to the word “truck”.) S2: Truck. T: Wonderful! A sticker for you. It’s a truck. /ʌk/, /ʌk/, duck. /ʌk/, /ʌk/, truck, truck, truck. Read after me: The duck is in the truck. Ss: The duck is in the truck. (5) Teach the words “bear, pear”. T: Now, I will draw an animal on the blackboard. Guess what it is! The fastest one can get a sticker. S3: It’s a bear. T: Nice job. You can get a sticker. Show a picture of a bear on the PPT.（出示课件） T: /eə(r)/, /eə(r)/, bear. Follow me: Growl, growl, bear. Ss: Growl, growl, bear. T: What’s this? (The teacher points to the picture on the PPT.) Ss: It’s a bear. （课件出示：鼠标点击熊的图片，一个梨子出现在熊的身下，图片下方 呈现 bear—pear） T: We know “ear” pronounces “/eə(r)/”. Change the first letter “b” of the word “bear” into “p”. Who can read the new word? S4: Pear! T: Great! You can get a sticker. It’s a pear. /p/-/eə(r)/, pear. Read after me: The bear is on the pear. Ss: The bear is on the pear. 2. Read and act. (1) Play the cartoon of “Let’s learn”.（课件出示：教材 P39 Let’s learn 板块的动画）Ask students to watch the cartoon and read after it. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the words and the dialogue by themselves. (3) Let students practice the words and the dialogue in pairs, and then act out the hand shadows of the five animals in class. Step 3: Practice 1. What is missing? Present the pictures of the five animals on the PPT at a time. （课 件出示：猪、熊、猫、鸭子和狗这五张图片同时出现后，每次随机让其中一 Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读。引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读单词和句子， 并能在与同伴的练习中，不 断加深对单词读音的记忆。 最后，借助手影表演，正确 地说出单词并巩固所学句 型。 Teaching purpose 通过难度系数不断上升 的游戏，学生对所学新词掌 握得越来越好。操练 chant 的难度不断降低，配合 TPR 活动，激发和维持学生的学 习兴趣。 141 张图片消失） Then ask students to find out the missing animal and say the word quickly. 2. What is this? The teacher chooses one student to come to the front and wears the headdress for him/ her. Then the student guesses what this is. Ss: What is this? S1: It’s a dog. Ss: No! S1: It’s a pig. Ss: No! S1: It’s a duck. Ss: Yes! (The teacher can choose three or four students to play the game.) 3. Let’s chant. (1) Watch the video and guess the meaning. The teacher plays the video of “Let’s chant”. (课件出示：教 材 P39 Let’s chant 板块的视频) Students watch the video and guess the meaning of the chant. (2) Listen, look and point. T: Class, let’s listen to the recording again. This time, you should listen and point to the pictures. For example: If you hear “Look at the cat. It is fat.”, you should point to the picture of “cat”. OK? Ss: OK! (3) Listen and chant. T: Now, let’s chant together after the recording! Are you ready? Let’s go! Ss: … Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Make a new chant. Ask students to make a new chant with the key words as the demonstration. 2. Welcome to the animals’ party. T: The animals are having a party in the zoo. Do you want to join them? Five students can come to the front. You can wear the headdresses and say like these: Hello, I’m a dog. / Good morning, I’m a cat! / How are you? I’m a bear! Teaching purpose 通过创编 chant、创设动 物聚会的情景，让学生结合 学过的句型自由表达，培养 学生的发散性思维。在本课 的最后，呈现可爱的小动物 视频，培养学生热爱动物、 保护动物的意识。 3. Watch a video about animals. T: You are so great! At last, let’s enjoy a video about animals. Look at the animals. They are so cute. We must love the animals. （课 件出示：一段关于动物的视频） ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Sing the chant to your family members. 3. Do the exercises.（见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业） ▶教学反思 1.TPR 教学法适合本课的教学，使得整节课活泼生动，让学生也能积极参与到课堂中来。 2.本课涉及单词的读音规则，教师利用了这个机会对自然拼读法进行渗透，让学生尝试拼读单词，为之后 的单词学习打下了基础。 3.本课涉及的单词较多，在 Let’s talk 板块已学过“duck, bear, dog”，因此在本课的教学中，多花 了一点时间在新词“pig, cat”的操练上。 4.板书设计简洁明了，对课堂教学起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to listen, speak and read the new words “pig, bear, cat, duck, dog”. · Be able to know the spellings of the words. Let’s chant · Be able to consolidate the pronunciation and the meanings of the words about animals, and initially perceive the meanings of some adjectives by singing the chant. · Be able to read the new words according to the pronunciation rules. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the new words “pig, bear, cat, duck, dog”. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to know the spellings of the words and read the new words according to the pronunciation rules. ▶Teaching Procedures 143 Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sharp eyes. Show some pictures on the PPT. 3. Listen and do. Give instructions. 1. Greetings. 2. Review the words and the sentence structures by observing the tails and footprints of “duck, bear, dog”. 3. Show the stationery according to the teacher’s instructions. Stimulate students’ interest in learning. Review the words and the sentence structures that students have learned in last lesson, and prepare for the following study. Presentation 1. Teach the new words. (1) Teach the words “cat, fat”. (2) Teach the words “pig, big”. (3) Teach the words “dog, log”. (4) Teach the words “duck, truck”. (5) Teach the words “bear, pear”. (1) Learn the words “cat, fat” and repeat the chant. (2) Learn the words “pig, big” and repeat the chant. (3) Learn the words “dog, log”. (4) Learn the words “duck, truck”. (5) Learn the words “bear, pear”. By using different methods, lead students to master the new words and sentences. Let students perceive the pronunciation rules first, and then teach students to use the phonics to read the new words. 2. Read and act. (1) Play the cartoon of “Let’s learn”. (2) Let students read the words and the dialogue by themselves. (3) Let students practice in pairs and act out the hand shadows in class. (1) Watch the cartoon and read after it. (2) Read the words and the dialogue by themselves. (3) Practice the words and the dialogue in pairs and act out the hand shadows of the five animals. Make sure that students can read the words and the sentences correctly and fluently. Consolidate the memory of the words and the sentence structures through the practice and the hand shadow show. Practice 1. What is missing？ Present the pictures on the PPT. Find out the missing animals and say the words quickly. Use the games and the TPR activity to arouse and maintain students’ interest in learning. Practice and consolidate the key words and sentences. 2. What is this? Guess what animal this is. 3. Let’s chant. Play the video of “Let’s chant”. (1) Watch the video and guess the meaning of the chant. (2) Listen, look and point. (3) Listen and chant. Consolidation & Extension 1. Make a new chant. Make a new chant about the animals as the demonstration. Develop students’ comprehensive ability of using English. Cultivate students’ awareness of loving and protecting animals. 2. Welcome to the animals’ party. Wear the headdresses and introduce themselves as an animal. 3. Play a video about animals. Watch the video about animals. Homework 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Sing the chant to your family members. 3. Do the exercises. The third period(第三课时) Part A Letters and sounds ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Letters and sounds ·能够听、说、读、写字母 Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn ·能够初步掌握这五个辅音字母作为单词首字母时的发音 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、读、写字母 Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn。 ▶教学难点 能够掌握这五个辅音字母的笔顺以及相关例词的发音。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、字母卡片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. T: Hi, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Miss/ Mr… T: Good morning! Ss: Good morning! T: Let’s play letter games, OK? Ss: OK! 2. Letter games. Teaching purpose 以游戏和 chant的形式， 复习已经学过的字母，激发 学生学习字母的兴趣，同时 也为接下来的新课的学习做 铺垫。 145 (1) Find out the adjacent letters. T: (Show the letter card “D” to students.) Look! If I show you “D”, you should say “C” and “E” loudly. OK? Ss: OK! (The teacher shows different letter cards. Students say the adjacent letters.) (2) Sort the letters. (There are two groups of disordered letters “A~I” on the blackboard. The teacher asks a boy and a girl to compete to sort the letters from A to I. The other students are the judges. The faster one is the winner.) T: Now, I need a boy and a girl to come to the front to sort the letters from A to I. The faster one can get a sticker. Who wants to have a try? Ss: … 3. Let’s chant. T: Now, let’s chant and do some actions. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new letters. (1) Teach the letter “Jj”. Show the letter card “J”. T: Look at the card. I see “J”. Follow me, please. J, J, J! Lead students to read it. Then let students find out J-shaped things in their daily lives. T: Can you say something that looks like “J”? (Students can say them in Chinese.) S1: 鱼钩。 S2: 伞柄。 … T: You are so clever! （课件出示：一辆吉普车的图片） T: Look, this is a jeep. J, /dʒ/, jeep! J, /dʒ/, jeep! Students follow the teacher and practice. （课件出示：吉普车里跳出一只青蛙的图片） Teaching purpose 让学生寻找生活中与这 五个辅音字母形状相似的物 品来增强字母学习的趣味 性，强化学生的记忆。将字 母教学和单词教学相结合并 融入语音知识，引导学生自 主探究字母在单词中的发音 规则。通过反复操练，使学 生理解并掌握这五个辅音字 母作为单词首字母时的发 音。注重培养学生的跟读和 模仿能力。 T: Look, the frog is jumping. J, /dʒ/, jump. J, /dʒ/, jump. The pronunciation of the letter “Jj” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/dʒ/”. Jj, Jj, Jj, /dʒ/, /dʒ/, /dʒ/, jeep, jump. Students read after the teacher and practice several times. (2) Teach the letter “Kk”. Show the letter card “K”. T: Look! This is the letter “K”. Follow me, please. K, K, K! Ss: K, K, K. T: Well done! （课件出示：一只风筝在天空中的图片） T: Look, this is a kite. K, /k/, kite! K, /k/, kite! Students follow the teacher and practice. （课件出示：Kate 在放风筝的图片） T: Look. Kate is flying a kite. K, /k/, Kate! K, /k/, Kate! The pronunciation of the letter “Kk” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/k/”. Kk, Kk, Kk, /k/, /k/, /k/, kite, Kate. Students read after the teacher and practice several times. T: Now, I say “Kate” or “kite”, and you say “K/k/”. I say “K/k/”, and you say “Kate” or “kite”. OK? Ss: OK. … (3) Teach the letter “Ll”. Show the letter card “L”. T: Look! This is the letter “L”. L, L, L! Lead students to read it. Then let students find out L-shaped things they are familiar with. T: Can you say something that looks like “L”? (Students can say them in Chinese.) S1: 锄头。 … T: You are so smart! (Take out a long ruler.) Look. The ruler is long. L, /l/, long! L, /l/, long! Students follow the teacher and practice. （课件出示：一只火烈鸟的图片） T: Look. The legs of the flamingo are very long, too. L, /l/, leg! L, /l/, leg! The pronunciation of the letter “Ll” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/l/”. Ll, Ll, Ll, /l/, /l/, /l/, long, leg. Students read after the teacher and practice several times. T: Now, I say “long” or “leg”, and you say “L/l/”. I say “L/l/”, and you say “long” or “leg”. OK? Ss: OK. … 147 (4) Teach the letter “Mm”. Show the letter card “M”. T: Look! This is the letter “M”. M, M, M! Lead students to read it. Then let students draw M-shaped things they are familiar with. T: Can you draw something that looks like “M”? (Give an example to students first, such as drawing two mountains.) Let students draw some other things that look like “M”. … T: Good job! （课件出示：抱着婴儿的“妈妈”的图片） T: Look, this is the baby’s mum. M, /m/, mum! M, /m/, mum! Students follow the teacher and practice. （课件出示：“妈妈”正在喝牛奶的图片） T: Look! Mum is drinking milk. M, /m/, milk! M, /m/, milk! The pronunciation of the letter “Mm” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/m/”. Mm, Mm, Mm, /m/, /m/, /m/, mum, milk. Students read after the teacher and practice several times. T: Who wants to be the little teacher? Now, you say “milk” or “mum”, and the others say “M/m/”. You say “M/m/”, and the others say “milk” or “mum”. S1: Let me try. … (5) Teach the letter “Nn”. Show the letter card “N”. T: Look! This is the letter “N”. N, N, N! Lead students to read it. Then let students draw N-shaped things they are familiar with. T: Can you draw something that looks like “N”? (Give an example to students first, such as drawing a door.) Let students draw some other things that look like “N”. … T: Well done! （课件出示：Zoom 的鼻子的图片） T: Look, this is the nose of Zoom. N, /n/, nose! N, /n/, nose! Students follow the teacher and practice. （课件出示：Zoom 正在看面条的图片） T: Look. Zoom is staring at the noodles. N, /n/, noodles! N, /n/, noodles! The pronunciation of the letter “Nn” in the two words is the same. It pronounces “/n/”. Nn, Nn, Nn, /n/, /n/, /n/, nose, noodles. Students read after the teacher and practice several times. T: Please work in pairs. One says “nose” or “noodles”, and the other says “N/n/”. One says “N/n/”, and the other says “nose” or “noodles”. OK? Ss: OK. … 2. Listen, repeat and chant. Play the video.（课件出示：教材 P40 Listen, repeat and chant 的 视频） Ask students to read after the video. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Show the chant of “Listen, repeat and chant”. T: Turn to page 40. Let’s listen and chant together! Step 3: Practice 1. Listen and circle. (1) Present the pictures and talk about them.（课件出示：教材 P40 Listen and circle 的图片） T: Look, what’s in Picture 1? Ss: A jeep. T: You are right! How about Picture 2? Ss: A leg. T: (Point to the picture of the kite.) Who can tell me? What’s this? S1: A kite. T: Wonderful! Next one? S2: Milk. T: Great! The last one? S3: Zoom’s nose. T: Cool! (2) Play the recording.（课件出示：教材 P40 Listen and circle 的 音频） T: Now, let’s listen and circle the first letter of the word you hear. For example, if you hear “jeep”, you should circle “j”. (3) Check the answers with students. (Answers: j; l; k; m; n) 2. Play a game—What’s missing? Teaching purpose 朗朗上口的韵律诗，既 让学生充满兴趣，又能帮助 学生按照正确的语音发音， 巩固新学的内容。 Teaching purpose 引导学生观察图片，对 图片进行预测，降低学习难 度。通过听音圈出听到的字 母，巩固新知。以补充首字 母的形式让学生进一步在单 词中操练新学的字母。 149 Show some pictures and the words on the PPT. Let students find out the missing letter in each word and fill in the blanks. Check the answers together. (Answers: j; k; l; m; n) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. Write down the letters “Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn” on the blackboard step by step. Ask students to write them down in their exercise books in the correct stroke order. Choose some students to write on the blackboard. Let students pay attention to the correct writing form of the letters. 2. Practice the letters and the related words. (1) Prepare five letter cards of “Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn”. Choose one student to come to the front. Let the student hold up the cards one by one. The other students read aloud the letters quickly. (2) Pair work. The teacher leads students to practice the related words in pairs. One student says a word, and the other student says the first letter of the word and writes it with his/her finger. The teacher gives an example first. T: Jeep. S1: Jj. (Use the finger to write the letter “Jj”.) T: Long. S1: Ll. (Use the finger to write the letter “Ll”.) … 3. Do the alphabet exercises. Play a video about the alphabet (J, K, L, M, N) exercises. （课件出 示：字母操视频的 J~N 片段）Students follow it to sing and do. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 在巩固环节，引导学生 在四线三格中正确书写字 母，培养学生规范的英文书 写习惯。以游戏的形式，进 一步加强学生对字母的理解 与认识。字母操增强字母语 音知识的趣味性。 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the chant of this lesson. 2. Do the exercises.（见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业） ▶教学反思 1.利用 TPR 教学法进行字母教学，既活跃了课堂氛围，又帮助学生巩固了知识。 2.教学活动以学生为主体，培养了学生的自主学习能力，充分发挥了学生的学习主动性。 3.活动设计丰富多彩，较大地激发了学生的学习热情，同时也有效地提升了学生的核心素养。 4.板书设计具有规范性，并提醒学生注意字母书写的细节，如大写字母 K 和小写字母 k 的区别，为学生正 确书写习惯的养成打下了良好的基础。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Letters and sounds · Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn”. · Be able to master the pronunciation of these five consonants as the first letter in words. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn”. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to master the spellings of these five consonants and the pronunciation of the related words. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Letter games. 3. Let’s chant. 1. Greetings. 2. Letter games. (1) Find out the adjacent letters. (2) Sort the letters. 3. Chant and do some actions. Use the letter games and the chant to create a pleasant learning environment. Review the letters that have learned and lay a good foundation for the next step. Presentation 1. Teach the new letters “Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn”. Learn the new letters. Find out or draw things Combine the teaching of letters with the 151 Show the letter cards. Ask students to find out or draw things that look like the letters. Teach the pronunciation of the letters in the related words. that look like the letters. Learn the pronunciation of the letters in the related words. teaching of words. Lead students to experience and find out the pronunciation rules of the letters in different words. Let students master the pronunciation of these five consonants as the first letter in words. Develop students’ autonomous learning ability. 2. Listen, repeat and chant. Play the video. Let students read after the video. Show the chant. Read after the video and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Then listen and chant together. The chant not only makes students full of interest in learning, but also helps students pronounce correctly and consolidate the new learning content. Practice 1. Listen and circle. (1) Present the pictures and talk with students. (2) Play the recording. Let students listen and circle the letters. (3) Check the answers. Talk about the pictures. Listen and circle the letters. Check the answers with the teacher. Lead students to observe the pictures. Reduce the difficulty of learning. Use games to arouse students’ interest in learning and consolidate students’ learning of the pronunciation of the letters. 2. Play a game—What’s missing? Show some pictures and the words on the PPT. Let students find out the missing letter in each word and fill in the blanks. Find out the missing letter in each word and fill in the blanks. Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. Write down the letters “Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn” on the blackboard step by step. Practice the writing of the letters. Lead students to write the letters correctly to cultivate students’ correct writing habit. Strengthen the understanding of the letters through the game. Use the alphabet exercises to make the phonetic learning more 2. Practice the letters and the related words. （1）Prepare five letter cards. （2）Pair work. Lead students to practice the related words in pairs. Practice the letters and the related words through the letter games. interesting.3. Do the alphabet exercises. Play a video. Follow the video to sing and do. Homework 1. Practice the chant of this lesson. 2. Do the exercises. The fourth period(第四课时) Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够理解对话大意，并能够用正确的语音、语调朗读对话 ·能够在语境中区分和运用“What’s this?”和“What’s that?” Let’s play ·能够在语境中运用句型“—What’s that? —It’s…”对远处的物品进行询问及作答 ▶教学重点 1. 能够理解对话大意，并能够用正确的语音、语调朗读对话。 2. 能够掌握、运用新句型“—What’s that? —It’s…”。 ▶教学难点 能够在语境中区分和运用“What’s this?”和“What’s that?”。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、教学挂图、动物头饰、动物图片、玩具望远镜等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hello, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Miss/ Mr… … 2. Let’s chant. Show the chant of “Let’s chant” on page 39. (课件出示：教材 P39 Let’s chant 板块的相关内容) Let students chant together. 3. A guessing game. Show the shadows of the animals on the PPT.（出示课件）Let students guess what they are as fast as possible. T: Guess! What’s this? You can ask me like this: A dog? ↗(Remind students to pay attention to the intonation. They should read with the rising tone.) S1: A…? ↗ Teaching purpose 复习之前学过的 chant， 活跃课堂气氛。通过看影子 猜动物，在导入环节渗透 “guess”，并提醒学生注意 提问的语调，为接下来的新 课做铺垫。 153 T: No. / Yes. … Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the sentence “What’s that?” T: (Point to the picture of a dog on the PPT.) What’s this? Ss: It’s a dog. (Lift the telescope and point to a toy pig at the back of the classroom.) T: Look! What’s that? Ss: It’s a pig. (Put a toy duck on the teacher’s desk. Take a toy bear and walk to a student who sits far from the teacher’s desk.) T: (Point to the toy bear.) S1, what’s this? S1: A bear. T: (Point to the toy duck on the teacher’s desk.) Look！What’s that? S1: It’s a duck. Write down the sentence structures “—What’s that? —It’s…” on the blackboard. Let students practice the sentence structures “—What’s this/ that? —It’s…” with some other objects. T: Can you tell me the difference between “What’s this?” and “What’s that?” Ss: … (They can speak in Chinese.) 2. Let’s talk. (1) Play the video of “Let’s talk”.（出示课件） T: Let’s watch the video of “Let’s talk” and think about the question. What are they talking about? Colours or animals? Ss: They are talking about animals. (2) Teach the sentences “—A bear? —No! It’s a panda.” （课件出示：教材 P41 Let’s talk 板块的第一幅图） T: Look! They are Mike and his sister. What do they see? Show the outline of a panda on the PPT.（出示课件） T: Guess! Can you say like this? Write down the sentence “A ______? ↗” on the blackboard. Ss: A bear/ cat/ dog? T: No. Let’s have a look. Show a picture of a panda on the PPT. (出示课件) T & Ss: It’s a panda. Write down the sentence “It’s a panda.” on the blackboard. T: The panda is black and white. Read after me: Panda, ↗panda. ↘It’s a panda. Students follow the teacher. Teaching purpose 由上一环节中模糊的动 物影子到呈现清晰的动物图 片或实物，由导入环节自然 过渡到授新环节。从距离的 远近让学生感知“What’s this?”和“What’s that?”的 用法及差异。几组示范后， 让学生自行操练句型并进行 总结，检测学生的掌握情况。 Teaching purpose 利用 Mike 和妹妹看马 戏的情景，自然地引出要学 的句型。有意识地用“Cool!” 评价学生，表达赞扬、欣赏， 为下一步呈现做好铺垫。 Teaching purpose 通过视频，让学生理解 “funny”的意思，并用自然 拼读法进行教读，PPT 动画 呈现不同动物的有趣片段， 学生进一步理解“funny”的 (3) Teach the sentence “Look! A funny dog!” Show a video of a panda. (出示课件) T: Look! The panda is so funny. Read after me: /fʌ/-/ni/, , funny, ↗funny. ↘ A funny panda! Who wants to act like a funny panda? One student acts like a panda. The teacher emphasizes the word “funny”. Write down the sentence “Look! A funny panda!” on the blackboard. The teacher shows some other funny animals (except a funny dog) on the PPT. (出示课件) Students can say: A funny… （课件出示：一只滑稽的小狗的图片） T: Look, what do you see? Ss: A funny dog! T: Cool! Read after me: A funny dog. (4) Teach the sentence “Cool! I like it!” （课件出示：教材 P41 Let’s talk 板块的第二幅图片） T: Do you like this funny dog? Ss: Yes! T: Oh, cool! I like it, too! Follow me, Mike→ like. (Do an action of “like”.) Cool! I like it! Write down the sentence “Cool! I like it!” on the blackboard. T: (Take out some animal stickers.) What animal do you like best? S1: I like dogs. T: (Pass a dog sticker to S1.) Here you are. You can say, “Cool! I like it.” S1: Cool! I like it. … 3. Read and act. (1) Play the video. (课件出示：教材 P41 Let’s talk 板块的视频) Let students read after the video and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the dialogue by themselves. (3) Let students practice the dialogue in pairs and act it out. Step 3: Practice 1. Let’s chant. Adapt the text into a chant. Lead students to clap their hands and chant. Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读 ,引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读对话，并能 在小组中进行角色扮演。 Teaching purpose 将课文内容以 chant 的 形式汇编在一起，在朗朗上 口的韵律中帮助学生巩固所 学知识，加深理解与记忆。 155 2. Let’s play. (1) Give an example to students. The teacher hides a picture of an animal behind his/ her back and makes a dialogue with a student. S1: What’s that? T: Guess! S1: A…? T: Yes. / No！ It’s a… S1: Cool! I like it! T: Thanks. Let students work in pairs. Imitate the dialogue and try to make their own dialogues. (2) Show time. Ask some pairs to show their dialogues in class. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension “Play a game—I am the host!” (1) Show a TV programme—Animal World.（课件出示：动物嬉戏的视 频，然后画面定格在有猪、熊、猫、鸭子、小狗、熊猫等动物的图片上） Make an example with a student. T & S1: Welcome to Animal World. We are the hosts of this programme. T: Look! What’s that? S1: It’s a… T: Look! A fat cat! S1: Cool! I like it. (2) Let students work in pairs to act as the hosts and show in class. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 Teaching purpose 通过猜一猜的游戏，让 学生操练核心句型，为后面 的拓展活动做准备。 Teaching purpose 创设真实的情景，让学 生拿起话筒，对屏幕上的动 物进行解说与介绍。让学生 产生想要表达的强烈意愿， 使学生学会在语境中运用本 节课所学的句型。 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a new dialogue. 3. Do the exercises.（见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业） ▶教学反思 1.本课的难点是“What’s this?”和“What’s that?”两个句型的比较和运用，以摆放在不同位置的实 物有效地帮助了学生理解。 2.本课的句型较多，利用课本提供的情景，一步一步引导学生理解每句话的意义，并结合课时话题创设新 的情景，对重点句型进行操练，取得了不错的效果。 3.各环节之间过渡自然，循序渐进，符合学生的年龄特点和认知水平，潜移默化地提高了学生的核心素养。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue and read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation. ·Be able to understand the difference between the sentences“What’s this?”and“What’s that?” and use them in context. Let’s play · Be able to use the sentence structures“—What’s that? —It’s…”to ask and answer the distant objects correctly in context. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue and read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation. ·Be able to master and use the new sentence structures “—What’s that? —It’s…” ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to understand the difference between the sentences “What’s this?” and “What’s that?” and use them in context. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s chant. 3. A guessing game. Show the shadows of the animals on the PPT. 1. Greetings. 2. Chant together. 3. Guess what animals they are as fast as possible. Stimulate students’ interest in learning and review the words and the sentences they have learned. Prepare for the next step. Presentation 1. Teach the sentence “What’s that?” Answer the teacher’s questions. Summarize the difference between “What’s this?” and“What’s that?” Let students understand the difference between “What’s this?” and “What’s that?” through the real objects. 157 2. Let’s talk. Play the video. Teach the sentences “—A bear? —No! It’s a panda.” “Look! A funny dog!” “Cool! I like it.” in different ways. Watch the video. Learn the new words and sentences. Attract students’ interest in learning by creating interesting situations. Help students learn the new knowledge more easily. 3. Read and act. Play the video. Read after the video. Read the dialogue by themselves. Practice the dialogue in pairs and act it out in class. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Practice 1. Let’s chant. Adapt the text into a chant. Clap hands and chant with the teacher. Adapt a chant to help students practice the key words and sentence structures. 2. Let’s play. (1) Give an example to students. (2) Show time. (1) Work in pairs and make their own dialogues. (2) Show their dialogues in class. Practice the key sentence structures through a guessing game. Get ready for the next step. Consolidation & Extension “Play a game—I am the host!” Show a video and make an example with a student. （1）Watch the video. （2）Work in pairs to act as the hosts and show in class. Use a real situation to develop students’ comprehensive language using ability. Improve students’ enthusiasm of expression. Encourage students to join in the game. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a new dialogue. 3. Do the exercises. The fifth period(第五课时) Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听辨、认读图片中单词“elephant, monkey, bird, tiger, panda, zoo”及其书写 形式 Let’s do ·能够听懂指示语“Act like a…”，并能够按照指令做出相应的动作 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、认读单词“elephant, monkey, bird, tiger, panda, zoo”。 ▶教学难点 能够正确区分“a”和“an”的用法。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、动物图片、动物头饰、动物玩具等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Good morning, boys and girls! Ss: Good morning, Miss/ Mr… 2. Sing the song—Old MacDonald. Play the song.（出示课件）Let students follow it to sing. 3. Listen and guess. T: Oink! Oink! What’s this? Ss: It’s a pig. T: Woof! Woof! What’s this? Ss: It’s a dog. … Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new words. (1) Teach the word “zoo”. Show the picture of Zoom and Zip in “Let’s learn” on the PPT. （出示课件） T: Look, who are they? Ss: Zoom and Zip. T: Guess! What are they looking at? Ss: … T:（课件出示：有“zoo”标志的动物园图片）Look, they are looking at the zoo. oo/u:/, zoo/zu:/. (Write down the word “zoo” on the blackboard.) Follow me, zoo, zoo, zoo. Students repeat the word and practice it in groups. (2) Teach the word “bird”. Play the recording of the sound that a bird makes.（出示课件） T: Listen, who is singing in the zoo? Ss: 小鸟。 T: Good, it’s a bird. (Write down the word “bird” on the blackboard.) Follow me: /b/-/ɜː/-/d/, . Bird,↗bird.↘ Ask students to pay attention to the pronunciation of the letter combination “ir” which pronounces “/ɜː/”. Let students practice the word row by row. Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 来拉近师生距离。歌曲营造 愉快的学习氛围，通过听声 音猜动物名称，帮助学生复 习前面学过的动物单词，为 后面的单词学习做好铺垫。 Teaching purpose 创设 Zoom 和 Zip 观察 动物园的情景，逐个引出本 课要学的单词，通过听音、 看脚印、说颜色猜动物、出 示部分身体部位等多种形式 呈现新单词。在模仿动作时， 由最初教师带领同学做，到 让学生自由发挥，充分发挥 学生的自主性。 159 Show a picture of a bird on the PPT.（出示课件）Walk far away from the teacher’s desk and point to the PPT. T: S1, look! What’s that? S1: It’s a bird. T: (Do the action.) I can act like a bird. Boys and girls, follow me: Act like a bird. Ss: (Do the action.) Act like a bird. Let students practice it row by row. (3) Teach the word “tiger”. Show the footprints of a tiger.（出示课件） T: Look at the footprints. Is it a duck? Ss: No. T: What’s that? Ss: A dog/ cat? T:（课件出示：老虎图片） Look, it’s a tiger. (Write down the word “tiger” on the blackboard.) Read after me. /t/-/aɪ/-/gə(r)/, . Tiger, tiger, tiger. Lead students to read the word “tiger” and practice it in high and low voice. T: (Do the action.) I can act like a tiger. Boys and girls, follow me: Act like a tiger. Ss: (Do the action.) Act like a tiger. (4) Teach the word “panda”. The teacher wears the headdress of Zoom and puts a telescope in front of his/ her right eye. T: Look, I am Zoom. I want to see the animals in the zoo. (Pretend to be looking at something.) Oh, I see an animal. It’s black and white. It is fat. What’s that? Ss: 熊猫。 T: Yes. It’s a panda. (Write down the word “panda” on the blackboard.) Follow me: /p/-/æn/-/də/, . Panda, ↗panda. ↘ Lead students to read the word “panda” several times. T: Who can act like a panda? S1: (Do the action.) Act like a panda. T: Boys and girls, follow him/ her: Act like a panda. Ss: (Do the action.) Act like a panda. (5) Teach the word “monkey”. Show a tail of a monkey on the PPT.（出示课件） T: A tail! What’s that? S1: A tiger? S2: A monkey？ T: Yes! It’s a monkey. (Write down the word “monkey” on the blackboard.) Follow me: /ʌ/-/mʌŋ/-/ki/, . Monkey, ↗monkey. ↘ Students practice it line by line. T: Act like a monkey. Ss: (Do the action.) Act like a monkey. (6) Teach the word “elephant”. Show a nose of an elephant on the PPT.（出示课件） T: What’s that? Ss:大象。 T: It’s an elephant. (Write down the word “elephant” on the blackboard.) Follow me: /e/, /e/, elephant. Ss: /e/, /e/, elephant. T: Cool! Act like an elephant. Ss: (Do the action.) Act like an elephant. Remind students that we can say “a monkey/bird/tiger/panda”, but we should say “an elephant”. T: We should say “an…” if a word begins with a vowel sound, for example: an elephant, an apple.（课件出示：an elephant, an apple 及 图片）We should say “a…” if a word begins with a consonant sound, for example: a dog, a cat.（课件出示：a dog, a cat 及图片） T: Now, I say the animal word, and you say “a…” or “an…”. OK? Ss: OK! T: Panda. Ss: A panda. T: Elephant. Ss: An elephant. … （课件出示：一些动物单词，两所房子，一个标有“a”,一个标有“an”） T: Look! Can you take the animals home? For example, we can say “a panda” “an elephant”. Who wants to have a try? Two students come to the front and finish the exercises on the PPT. The teacher and the other students check the answers together. 2. Read and act. (1) Play the recording of “Let’s learn”. （课件出示：教材 P42 Let’s learn 板块的音频） Ask students to read after the recording. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the words and the sentences by themselves. (3) Ask some students to the front to read the words and the sentences in class. Check if they read correctly and fluently. Step 3: Practice 1. Listen and touch. Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读 ,引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读单词和句子。 Teaching purpose 由词到句，由教师引导 过渡到学生和教师合作，再 到学生自己输出，难度层层 递增，学生在有梯度的活动 中，不断巩固所学单词和句 型。 161 Two students are invited to the front. After the teacher says a word, two students touch the word on the blackboard quickly. The others repeat the word. The words are said faster and faster. The winner can get two stickers. 2. A guessing game. The teacher hides a picture of an animal behind his/her back. The picture will be shown to students if someone says the right answer. The winner can get a sticker and be the little teacher. T: Guess. What’s that? S1: It’s a panda. T: No. S2: It’s a dog. T: No. … 3. Pair work. (1) Let students work in pairs to ask and answer with each other. T: Take out and show me your pictures of animals. Now you can ask and answer with your partners. S1: What’s that? S2: It’s a / an… S2: What’s that? S1: It’s a / an… (2) Show time. Ask some pairs to come to the front and have a show. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Let’s do. (1) Show some pictures of different animals one by one. (出示课 件) Let students say the words through the pictures. T:（Show the picture of a bird.）You can say like this: Act like a bird. Bird, bird, bird. (Show the picture of a tiger.) Ss: Act like a tiger. Tiger, tiger, tiger. … (2) Do the actions and say the instructions. Students do and say as the teacher does. Play the video of “Let’s do”. (出示课件) Ask students to practice after the video. (3) Divide the whole class into five groups. The teacher says the instructions and the groups act accordingly at once. The group which does the actions the fastest and most tidily wins. 2. Introduce the picture books about animals. Enjoy the song—Brown bear, brown bear, what do you see? T: Class, do you love animals? Teaching purpose TPR 教学法让学生在 “做中玩、玩中做”，可以极 大地提升学生的学习热情。 同时也能巩固本节课所学的 新单词以及指令语。 Teaching purpose 在课堂的最后，对学生 进行情感教育。推荐与本课 时主题相关的绘本，有利于 培养学生热爱阅读的良好习 惯，在阅读中陶冶情操。 Ss: Yes! T: I love animals! We love animals! Now, let’s enjoy the song—Brown bear, brown bear, what do you see? （课件出示：歌曲的视 频） Students watch the video and listen to the song. T:（课件出示：两个绘本故事的相关介绍） After class, you can read the picture books Brown bear, brown bear, what do you see? and Good night, gorilla. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Read the words and the sentences. 2. Do the actions of “Let’s do” to your family members. 3. Do the exercises.（见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业） ▶教学反思 1.活动的设计有层次、有梯度，由易到难，充满趣味性，便于学生掌握。 2.本课单词教学中，以听音、看脚印、说颜色猜动物、出示部分身体部位等多种方式呈现新单词,形式多 样。并且注重语音细节，有意识地培养学生规范读音的好习惯。 3.介绍与主题相关的绘本，拓展学生的知识视野，培养学生的核心素养。 4.板书设计条理清晰，一目了然，突出教学重点。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to listen and read the new words “elephant, monkey, bird, tiger, panda, zoo”, and know the writing form of these new words. Let’s do · Be able to understand the instructions “Act like a…” and do the actions according to the instructions. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words “elephant, monkey, bird, tiger, panda, zoo”. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to distinguish the usage of “a” and “an” correctly. 163 ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—Old MacDonald. 3. Listen and guess. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song. 3. Listen to the sound and guess what animal it is. Use a song to stimulate students’ interest in learning and help students review the words about animals by a guessing game. Presentation 1. Teach the new words. Teach the new word “zoo” with the picture. Teach the new words “bird, tiger, panda, monkey, elephant” with the sound, the footprints, the tail and so on. Do the corresponding actions with students. Learn the new words and do the actions. Arouse students’ interest in learning by creating a real situation. Lead students to learn the new words about animals in different and interesting ways. 2. Read and act. Play the recording of “Let’s learn”. Check students’ pronunciation. Read after the recording. Read the words and the sentences by themselves. And then read to the class. Make sure that students can read the words and the sentences correctly and fluently. Practice 1. Listen and touch. Touch the word they hear as fast as possible. Use different activities to help students practice and consolidate the key words and sentence structures. Help students achieve language output. 2. A guessing game. Hide a picture behind his/her back. Say what the animal is loudly and quickly. 3. Pair work. Work in pairs to practice the dialogue. Show it to the class. Consolidation & Extension 1. Let’s do. (1) Show some pictures of different animals one by one. Let students say out the words through the pictures. (2) Do the actions and say the instructions. (3) Lead students to compete in groups. Do and say as the teacher does. Compete in groups. Use TPR teaching method to develop students’ comprehensive language using ability. Develop students’ good habits of reading, learning and thinking. 2. Introduce the picture books about animals. Watch the video and listen to the song. Learn about the two picture books about animals. Homework 1. Read the words and the sentences. 2. Do the actions of “Let’s do” to your family members. 3. Do the exercises. The sixth period(第六课时) Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Start to read ·能够找出并能听、说、读、写图片中的字母 ·能够熟练听说、认读本单元所有动物单词并掌握其书写形式 Let’s check ·能够独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习 Let’s sing ·能够听懂、跟唱歌曲，并用其他学过的动物单词进行替换练习 ▶教学重点 复习并掌握本单元所学字母及动物单词。 ▶教学难点 能够独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、字母卡片、单词卡片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s do. The teacher says the instructions and students do the actions. T: Act like a/ an monkey/ bird/ tiger/ panda/ elephant/… 3. What’s this? Show the letter card and ask, “What’s this?” Ss: m/N/J/l/… Step 2: Presentation 1. Look and finish. (1) Sharp eyes. Show some cute pictures about the letters “Jj, Kk, Ll, Mm, Nn” on the PPT. (出示课件) T: Boys and girls! Look at these pictures. What letters can you see? Please read them aloud. Ss: … (2) Find and say. Teaching purpose 通过复习上节课 Let’s do 板块中的指令语,以及用 句型“What’s this？”复习本 单元所学的字母，让学生迅 速投入英语课堂中来。 Teaching purpose 利用观察图片、找一找、 说一说的方式来复习、认读 和识别本单元的字母。 165 Show the picture of “Find and say”.（课件出示：教材 P43 Find and say 的图片） T: Here is a beautiful picture. We can see many beautiful things. Wow! Look! I see a capital letter “L”. (Point to the letter “L”.) What letters do you see? S1: I see… S2: I see… S3: I see… S4: I see k, n, j… … Ask students to count the letters. T: How many capital letters “J/K/L/M/N” do you see? Ss: … T: How many lowercase letters “j/k/l/m/n” do you see? Ss: … 2. Review the words about animals. Show the pictures and the word cards about animals to students. (出示课件) Ask students with “What’s this?” and lead students to answer with the sentence structure “It’s a/an…” T: What’s this? S1: It’s a… What’s this? S2: It’s a… What’s this? S3: It’s an… … 3. Read and count. Show the picture of “Read and count”. （课件出示：教材 P43 Read and count 的图片） Explain the meaning of the exercise and make a demonstration first. Finally let students write down the numbers by themselves. T: Look! (Point to the upper part of “Read and count”.) What animals are there? Ss: Elephant, cat, bird, dog, pig and monkey. T: Let’s spell the words one by one. OK? Ss: OK. T: Duck. Ss: D-U-C-K, duck. T: Good. Dog. Ss: D-O-G, dog. T: Great! Pig/cat/bear/elephant/monkey/bird/tiger/panda. Ss: … T: Oh, the elephant eats two kinds of food. What about the cat/ bird/…? Now, finish the exercises by yourselves. Step 3: Practice Teaching purpose 通过动物图片和单词卡 片，帮助学生复习本单元重 点单词和句型。在这一环节 中，教师进一步放手，让学 生以接龙方式，持续问答， 提高学生的课堂参与度。 Teaching purpose 让学生读出看见的动 物，找出每种动物对应的单 词个数。做到音形对应，巩 固所学单词和句型。 Teaching purpose 在听听力之前，一定要 先做预测。让学生有准备地 去听听力，养成良好的听力 习惯。以开火车等多种操练 方式巩固本单元的重点句型 及动物单词。 1. Listen and number. Show the pictures.（课件出示：教材 P44 Listen and number 的图片） Let students look at the four pictures. Ask some questions and lead them to answer. T: What do you see in Picture 1? S1: I see John. S2: I see a monkey. T: What do you see in Picture 2? S3: I see Sarah and Mike. S4: I see a bird. T: What do you see in Picture 3 and Picture 4? S5: I see a panda. S6: I see a bear. T: OK! What are they talking about? Now, let’s listen and number. Then play the recording and let students finish the task. （课 件出示：教材 P44 Listen and number 的音频） Check the answers together. (课件出示：教材 P44 Listen and number 的听力材料及答案) 2. Look and match. Show the pictures. （课件出示：教材 P44 Look and match 的图片） Let students say the words about animals they have learned one by one first. Then ask them to finish the task by themselves. T: Let’s say the words about animals one by one! S1: Bird. S2: Tiger. S3: Dog. … T: Well done! Now, please match the words to the pictures. The teacher and students check the answers together. (课件出示： 教材 P44 Look and match 的答案) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let’s sing! （1）Play the video of the song for the first time.（课件出示： 教材 P44 Let’s sing 板块的视频） Let students watch the video carefully. T: Let’s enjoy the song together! If you can sing, follow it, please. Ss: … （2）Play the song again.（出示课件）Lead students to wave hands and sing along with the video. Let them practice in groups. Invite some Teaching purpose 学生对经典童谣《Old MacDonald》的旋律比较熟 悉 ,通过替换本单元学过的 其他动物单词，让这首歌更 加丰富。既能够培养和锻炼 学生的创新思维，同时也能 活跃学习氛围，让学生收获 成就感，在愉悦的氛围中结 束这堂课的学习。 167 students to sing in the front, and the others sing and wave hands with them. （3）Make a new song. Let students try to make a new song by replacing the words about animals. Give an example： ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Sing the song to your family members. 2. Read the story of “Story time”. 3. Do the exercises.（见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业） ▶教学反思 1.以“滚雪球”的方法学习英语，做到以旧带新，以新温旧。 2.设置的教学活动循序渐进，符合学生的认知能力，易于被学生接受和掌握。 3.歌曲创新，亮点纷呈，效果极佳。学生的创意在这一刻得到充分体现。 4.板书设计条理清晰，一目了然，突出教学重点。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Start to read · Be able to find as well as listen, speak, read and write the letters in the picture. · Be able to listen and read the words about animals of this unit, and master their spellings. Let’s check · Be able to finish the task of “Let’s check” independently. Let’s sing ·Be able to understand and sing along with the song, and create a new song by replacing the words about animals. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Review and master the letters and the words about animals of this unit. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to finish the task of “Let’s check” independently. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s do. Say the instructions. 3. What’s this? Show the letter cards and ask questions. 1. Greetings. 2. Do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions. 3. Review the letters of this unit. The TPR activity can stimulate students’ interest in learning and help students review the knowledge they have learned. Presentation 1. Look and finish. (1) Sharp eyes. Show some cute pictures about the five letters on the PPT. (2) Find and say. Show the picture of “Find and say”. (1) Look at the pictures and read aloud the letters. (2) Try to count the letters and find out the most letters. Lead students to review the letters they have learned through observing, finding and saying. 2. Review the words about animals. Show the pictures and the word cards and ask with “What’s this?” Look at the pictures and the word cards. Answer the teacher’s questions by using the sentence structure “It’s a/ an…” Create an interesting learning environment and help students consolidate the words about animals and the sentence structures of this unit. Enhance students’ class participation. 3. Read and count. Show the picture of “Read and count”. Explain the meaning of the exercise and make a demonstration. Check the spellings of the words about animals. Look at the pictures of the upper part of “Read and count” and say the words about animals. Spell the words about animals one by one. Read and count independently. Ask students to say the words about animals they see and count the number of each kind of animal. Achieve the corresponding of the sound and the shape. Consolidate the words and the sentence structures they have learned. Practice 1. Listen and number. Show the pictures and play the Observe and talk about the pictures. Listen to the Help students improve their listening skills 169 recording. Check the answers. recording and finish the task. by making prediction before listening. Use different activities to practice and consolidate the learning of the words about animals. 2. Look and match. Show the pictures. Let students say the words about animals one by one and then match the words to the pictures. Check the answers. Say the words about animals one by one. Match the words to the pictures. Consolidation & Extension Let’s sing. Play the video of the song—Old MacDonald. Lead students to understand and learn the song. Let students sing along with the video and make a new song. Listen to the song, wave hands and sing along with the video. Practice in groups. Try to make a new song. Create an active learning environment. Cultivate and train students’ innovative thinking. Let students gain a sense of achievement. Homework 1. Sing the song to your family members. 2. Read the story of “Story time”. 3. Do the exercises. Unit 5 Let’s eat! 教材分析 本单元学习的主题是食物。教学内容主要是围绕孩子们在家里和在郊外用餐时发生的故事 来展开的。教学重点是能够听懂、会说核心句型“I’m hungry.” “Have some…” “I’d like some…” “Here you are.” “You’re welcome.”； 能够听、说、认读单词“bread, juice, egg, milk, water, cake, fish, rice”。 教学目标 知识目标： 句型 ·能听懂、会说句型“I’m hungry.” “Have some…” “I’d like some…” “Here you are.” “You’re welcome.” 词汇 ·能听、说、认读单词“bread, juice, egg, milk, water, cake, fish, rice” 字母与语音 ·能正确听、说、读、写字母 Oo, Pp, Qq, Rr, Ss, Tt 并知道其在单词中的发音 能力目标： ·能够在图片、实物或情境的帮助下运用句型“I’d like some…” “Can I have some…?” 表达想吃的食物以及用“Here you are.”“Have some…”为别人提供食物或请别人吃东西 ·能够在情境中运用句型“Thank you./Thanks.”表达感谢及用“You’re welcome.”作答 ·听到字母能说出其对应的发音 情感态度、文化意识、学习策略目标： ·能够比较中西方早餐的异同，了解中西方餐具和菜谱的不同 ·能够建立单词音、义、形之间的联系，整体学习单词 课时安排 第一课时: Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play 第二课时: Part A Let’s learn & Let’s do 第三课时: Part A Letters and sounds 第四课时: Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play 第五课时: Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do 第六课时: Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing 171 The first period(第一课时) Part A Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够通过听录音，学会用正确的语音、语调朗读对话，并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够听懂、会说并能在语境中运用核心句型“I’d like some…”“Have some…” Let’s play ·能够在句子接龙游戏中巩固记忆食物单词以及句型“I’d like some…” ▶教学重点 1. 能够理解和掌握本课时的重点单词和句型。 2. 能够在情景中运用句型“I’d like some…”“Have some…”来交流有关食物的信息。 ▶教学难点 能够在真实的语境中运用本课时的句型自然流利地进行对话。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.PPT 课文录音、视频、单词卡片、食物图片、人物头饰、教学实物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. The teacher wears an apron and greets students. 2. Sing the song—Old MacDonald. （出示课件） 3. Revision. T: Boys and girls, please take out your school things. I say, you do. Let’s chant! T: I have a ruler! Ss: Me too! (Show their rulers.) T: I have a pencil! Ss: Me too! (Show their pencils.) … Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the words and the sentences. The teacher holds a tray covered by table linen. There is juice, bread and two eggs on the tray. T: Boys and girls, look! I have a lot of delicious food. Do you want to know what’s on the tray? Ss: Yes! T: Please guess. Teaching purpose 教师化身“围裙妈妈” 进入教室，与学生打招呼， 复习歌曲，再以 TPR活动热 身，营造良好的英语学习氛 围，使学生能轻松、自信地 投入到英语学习中。 Teaching purpose 教师化身“围裙妈妈”， 用托盘呈现食物，自然引入 新知，创设真实的学习情境， 激发学生的学习兴趣，让学 生轻松理解并掌握新单词和 句型，再通过义形配对，进 一步操练单词。 Ss: …T: Look! I have juice. I’d like some juice. Write down the sentence “I’d like some juice.” on the blackboard and teach it. Help students get the meaning of the sentence by body language. Lead students to reply with “Me too!” Give a bottle of juice to a student. T: Here you are. Have some juice. S1: Thank you. Write down the sentences “Here you are. Have some juice.” on the blackboard and teach them. Teach the new words “bread” and “egg” in the same way. Pay attention to the word “eggs”. 2. Do a matching work. Put up the pictures of juice, bread and an egg on the blackboard. Take out the word cards. T: Boys and girls, look at the word cards. Can you put up the word cards under the right pictures? Ask three students to the front and do the matching work. Check the answers together. 3. Let’s talk. (1) Look and say. Let students look at the picture of “Let’s talk” carefully. Ask some questions to help them predict the main idea of the dialogue. (2) Teach the sentence structures. ①Play the cartoon of “Let’s talk” for the first time.（课件 出示:教材 P48 Let’s talk 板块的视频） T: What would Mike like? Ss: Juice. T: How does he say? Ss: He says, “I’d like some juice, please.” Take out some pictures of food and make a dialogue with a student. T: What would you like? Let the student pick a picture. S1: I’d like some… T: (Give him/her the picture.) Here you are. S1: Thank you. / Thanks. Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观察 并讨论图片，借助图片预测 教学内容，培养学生的观察 能力和逻辑推理能力。 Teaching purpose 借助卡片及实物教授句 型，创造情境教学。播放录 音，让学生听录音跟读，引 导学生按照正确的语音、语 调朗读对话。小组排练，戴 上人物头饰完成“配音秀”， 培养学生的模仿能力并加深 学生对句型的理解。 173 ②Play the cartoon again. Let students listen to the recording and repeat. Remind them to pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Teach the sentence structure “Have some…” Give out some food and say, “Have some…” Ss: Thank you. / Thanks. ③Do a dubbing show. Lead students to read the dialogue. Let students practice in pairs. Play the video without subtitles. Let students wear the headdresses and do a dubbing show. Step 3: Practice 1. Whisper. Let students work in groups to pass on the three sentences “I’d like some…” “Here you are.” “Have some…” in a low voice. Give the prize to the best group. 2. Let’s play. (1) Play the video of “Let’s play”. (课件出示：教材 P48 Let’s play 板块的视频) Let students say the food they see. Then let students read after the recording. (2) Look and say. Let students look at the three pictures. Practice the sentence structure “I’d like some…” in groups, then show in class. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Welcome to our Gourmet Festival! （活动说明:让一些学生拿出事先准备好的食物并在讲台前依次摆开，在 教室模拟美食节场景。另外的学生以小组或个人为单位来逛美食节，挑选自 己想吃的美食。） 2. Share a video. Share a video about the differences between Chinese breakfast and western breakfast. （出示课件） ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 通过游戏和视频等方 式，让学生在真实的语境中 操练句型，培养学生的合作 竞争意识，加深学生对新知 识的理解和记忆。 Teaching purpose 设计美食节活动，让学 生在真实的场景中自主操练 句型，激发学生的学习兴趣 和提高学生的综合语言运用 能力。最后分享一段中西式 早餐的区别的视频，拓展学 生的课外知识，开阔学生的 眼界。 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a menu for tomorrow’s breakfast. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 通过教师扮演“围裙妈妈”和组织班级“美食节”，为学生创设真实的情境，让学生在真实的语境中自 然流利地运用本节课的句型进行对话，培养学生的综合语言运用能力。 2. 让学生观察图片，借助图片预测教学内容，注重对学生观察能力的培养和学习方法的指导。 3. 教学过程中充分发挥老师的示范作用，活动开始前，教师都做了良好的示范。 4. 拓展学生的课外知识，让其了解中西式早餐的不同，感知中外文化差异，适时渗透情感价值观的教育。 5. 板书设计清晰明了，重点突出，起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the picture. · Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. · Be able to use the sentence structures “I’d like some…” “Have some…” properly in context. Let’s play · Be able to consolidate the words about food and the sentence structure “I’d like some…” in the game. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key words and sentence structures of this lesson. ·Be able to use the sentence structures“I’d like some…”“Have some…”to talk about food. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structures of this lesson to make natural and fluent dialogues in real context. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up 1. Greetings. 1. Greetings. Help students review 175 & Revision Wear an apron and greet students. 2. Sing the song—Old MacDonald. 3. Revision. 2. Sing the song. 3. Chant and do the actions as the teacher says. the old knowledge and create a good English learning atmosphere. Presentation 1. Teach the words and the sentences. Let students guess the food on the tray and teach the words and the sentences. Guess the food on the tray. Guess the food on the tray. Learn the words and the sentences. Lead in the words naturally. Let students understand and master the new words and sentence structures easily. Cultivate students’ interest in learning. Practice the words through the matching work. 2. Do a matching work. Put up the pictures of juice, bread and an egg on the blackboard. Finish the matching task. Put up the word cards under the right pictures. 3. Let’s talk. (1) Look and say. Let students look at the picture carefully and ask some questions. (2) Teach the sentence structures. ①Play the cartoon and make a dialogue with a student. ②Let students listen to the recording and repeat. ③Lead students to read the dialogue. Let students practice in pairs. Play the video without subtitles. Let students wear the headdresses and do a dubbing show. (1) Look at the picture carefully. Think and talk about the questions to predict the main idea of the dialogue. (2)①Watch the cartoon and learn the sentence structures “— I’d like some… —Here you are.” ②Listen to the recording and repeat. Pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. Learn the sentence structure “Have some…” ③Read the dialogue after the teacher. Practice in pairs. Wear the headdresses and do a dubbing show. Cultivate students’ observation and logical reasoning ability. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Activate the atmosphere through the dubbing show. Cultivate students’ imitation ability and strengthen their understanding of the key sentence structures. Practice 1. Whisper. Work in groups to pass on Give the prize to the best group. the three sentences in a low voice. 2. Let’s play. (1) Play the video. (2) Look and say. Show three pictures on the PPT. (1) Watch the video and say the food they see. Read after the recording. (2) Look at the pictures. Practice the sentence structure “I’d like some…”in groups, then show in class. Strengthen students’ understanding of the sentence structures. Cultivate their sense of cooperation and competition. Consolidation & Extension 1. Welcome to our Gourmet Festival! Go to the Gourmet Festival and practice the sentence structures. Create a natural and real situation to practice the sentence structures. Expand students’ extra knowledge through the video. 2. Share a video. Watch a video about the differences between Chinese breakfast and western breakfast. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a menu for tomorrow’s breakfast. 3. Do the exercises. The second period（第二课时） Part A Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s learn 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够听、说、认读单词“bread, egg, milk, juice”，并辨认其书写形式 ·能够通过多种活动运用句型“I’m hungry.”“Have some…”交流有关食物的信息 Let’s do ·能够在图片、动作和音频的帮助下理解、跟读指令，并能够根据指令做出相应的动作或 根据动作说出相应的指令性用语 ▶教学重点 1. 能够听、说、认读单词“bread, juice, egg, milk”。 2. 能够在情景中运用句型“I’m hungry.”“Have some…”来交流有关食物的信息。 ▶教学难点 能够听懂 Let’s do 板块的指令性用语，并做出相应的动作。 177 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、食物图片、教学实物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—I’m hungry.（出示课件） 3. Share your menu. Check the homework. Let students share and introduce their breakfast menu with the sentence structure “I’d like some…” Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new words. (1) Teach the word “bread”. T: Boys and girls, I just came back from the supermarket and I bought some nice food for you. What’s in my basket? Who wants to touch and guess? If you’re right, I’ll give you the food. Invite a student to the front. Let him/her touch the food in the basket and guess what it is. T: What’s that? Can you guess? S1: Bread! T: Great! You’re so clever. Here you are. Have some bread. S1: Thank you! Teach the word“bread”by passing the word card. The teacher acts and says,“Oh, I’m hungry. /h/-/ʌŋ/-/g/-/ri/, / /.” Help students get the meaning of the sentence by body language and lead them to reply. Ss: Have some bread! The teacher gives out the bread to students and makes the gesture: Eat some bread. (2) Teach the word “egg”. Invite another student to the front of the classroom. Let him/her touch the food and guess. T: What’s that? S2: An egg. T: Bingo! I have some eggs. Here you are. Have some eggs! S2: Thanks. Teach the word “egg” by passing the real egg. T: Oh, I’m still hungry. Ss: Have some eggs. The teacher gives out the eggs to students and makes the gesture: Have some eggs. (3)Teach the word“milk”. Teaching purpose 以歌曲热身，活跃课堂 气氛，激发学生学习新知的 欲望。让学生分享早餐食谱， 复习旧知，检测学生的学习 效果。 Teaching purpose 通过让学生摸一摸、猜 一猜篮子里的食物，引出新 授单词，激发学生的学习兴 趣。同时借助单词卡片、实 物及丰富的肢体语言，让学 生在情境中理解和学习重点 单词及句型，加深学生对单 词和句型的理解和记忆。 Teaching purpose 通过蒙住学生的眼睛， 让其试喝并猜出杯子里的液 体来吸引学生的注意力。同 时运用大小声、唱反调等方 法教授单词，活跃课堂氛围， 做到把单词放在句型中进行 教学。 Invite a student to the front, then cover his/her eyes. Give him/her a bottle of milk, and let him/her drink and guess. T: What is it? S3: Milk. T: Excellent! Have some milk! Teach the word “milk” in high and low voice. T: Now, I’m thirsty. (Act and say.) Ss: Have some milk! The teacher gives out the milk to students and makes the gesture: Drink some milk. (4) Teach the word“juice”. Invite a student to the front, then cover his/her eyes. Give him/her a bottle of juice, and let him/her drink and guess. Teach the word “juice” in opposite tune. T: Mmm, I’m still thirsty. Ss: Have some juice. The teacher gives out the juice to students and makes the gesture: Have some juice. 2. Let’s learn. (1) Look and guess. T: I’m hungry. I guess you are hungry, too. What about Sarah? Please look at the picture of “Let’s learn” and guess the answers to the questions. (2) Play the video of “Let’s learn”.（课件出示：教材 P49 Let’s learn 板块的视频）Teach the sentence“I’m hungry.” by body language. Check the answers. (Answers: Q1: Sarah is hungry. Juice and an egg. Q2: Milk and bread.) (3) Let students read the dialogue after the recording and practice the dialogue in pairs. Step 3: Practice 1. Do a matching work. Put up the word cards about the food and drinks on the blackboard and take out the relevant pictures. Let some students choose the right pictures to do a matching work. 2. Sharp eyes. Show the pictures of bread, an egg, juice and milk one by one on the PPT.（出示课件） T: Class, please look at the pictures carefully. If you know what it is, you can stand up and say it in English loudly. Now, begin! Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观察 并讨论图片，培养学生的观 察能力和逻辑推理能力。 Teaching purpose 设计三组活动，调动学 生学习的积极性。同时，创 设情境教学，让学生在活动 中自然地运用所学语言进行 交流，达到学以致用的目的。 179 3. Make a new dialogue. T: Exchange and share your food stickers by using the sentence structures “I’m hungry.” “Have some…” with your partners. Ask two students to make a demonstration: S1: I’m hungry. S2: Have some eggs. S1: Thank you. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let’s do. (1) I say, you do. Play the cartoon of “Let’s do” for the first time. (课件出示： 教材 P49 Let’s do 板块的视频) Let students get the meaning of it. Then play the cartoon again, and lead students to do actions with the cartoon. Help students understand the meanings of the words “eat, drink” by body language. Let students do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions and practice in groups, then show it in class. S1: Have some eggs. S2: (Do the actions.) … … (2)I do, you say. Play the game in pairs. One student does the actions, and the other student says the sentences. Then let students fill in the blanks. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 设计“我说你做”和“我 做你说”的活动，调动学生 多种感官参与，激发学生的 学习热情，通过多样化的教 学形式，吸引学生的注意力。 让学生根据图片提示补全句 子，强化学生对单词和句型 的记忆。 ▶作业设计 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Do a survey: What would your family like? 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 充分利用实物、卡片等进行直观教学，贴近学生的生活实际，给学生以视觉冲击，调动学生的积极性， 有利于他们学习和掌握新知识。 2. 注重对学生的评价，如使用“Great!”“Bingo!”“Excellent!”等鼓励性语言，及时给予学生以肯定， 增强学生的自信心。 3. 为学生创设真实的语言环境，与生活紧密相连，引导学生进行真实的语言交际。 4. 利用游戏等多种教学手段进行单词教学，能较好地活跃课堂氛围，激发学生的学习热情。 5. 板书设计清晰明了，重点突出，起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the picture. · Be able to listen, speak and read the words “bread, egg, milk, juice”, and recognize their writing forms. · Be able to use the sentence structures “I’m hungry.”“Have some…”to talk about food. Let’s do · Be able to understand and read the instructions and do the corresponding actions according to the instructions or say the corresponding instructions according to the actions. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words “bread, egg, milk, juice”. ·Be able to use the sentence structures“I’m hungry.”“Have some…”to talk about food in situations. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to understand the sentences of “Let’s do” and do the corresponding actions ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—I’m hungry. 3. Share your menu. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song. 3. Share and introduce their breakfast menu. Stimulate students’ interest in learning. Review the last lesson and check the learning effects. Presentation 1. Teach the new words. Let students touch and guess the food in the basket to teach the words “bread, egg”. Let students drink and guess the liquid in the two Touch and guess the food in the basket. Learn the words “bread, egg” by passing the word card and passing the real egg. Drink and guess the liquid Lead in the new words properly. Teach the words in sentences. Help students understand and master the new words easily. 181 bottles to teach the words “milk, juice”. in the two bottles. Learn the words “milk, juice” in high and low voice and opposite tune. Meanwhile, cultivate students’ interest in learning and help them understand the sentences through the gestures. 2. Let’s learn. (1) Let students look at the picture and ask some questions. (2) Play the video and teach the sentence “I’m hungry.” Check the answers. (3) Let students read after the recording and practice the dialogue in pairs. (1) Look at the picture and guess the answers to the questions. (2) Watch the video and learn the sentence “I’m hungry.” (3) Read after the recording and practice the dialogue in pairs. Lead students to observe and talk about the picture with questions. Cultivate students’ observation and logical reasoning ability. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Do a matching work. Put up the word cards on the blackboard and take out the relevant pictures. Try to choose the right pictures to do a matching work. Create a natural and real situation to practice the words and the sentence structures. Train students’ ability of speaking. Let students use the words and the sentence structures skillfully. 2. Sharp eyes. Play the game. Try to say the words as fast as they can. 3. Make a new dialogue. Make a new dialogue in pairs to practice the words and sentence structures. Consolidation & Extension Let’s do. (1)I say, you do. (2)I do, you say. (1) Watch the cartoon. Do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions. (2) Say the sentences according to the actions. And fill in the blanks. Help students understand the key words and sentence structures better. Stimulate their enthusiasm for learning, and attract students’ attention through various teaching forms. Homework 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Do a survey: What would your family like? 3. Do the exercises. The third period（第三课时） Part A Letters and sounds ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Letters and sounds ·能够听、说、读、写字母 Oo，Pp，Qq，Rr，Ss，Tt，并在学习字母音、形的基础上，初 步掌握元音字母 Oo 和五个辅音字母作为单词首字母时的发音 ▶教学重点 1. 能够听、说、读、写字母 Oo，Pp，Qq，Rr，Ss，Tt。 2. 能够初步掌握元音字母 Oo 和五个辅音字母作为单词首字母时的发音。 ▶教学难点 能够掌握字母的笔顺以及相关例词的发音。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、字母卡片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—ABC song. （出示课件） 3. Revision. T: Now, let’s chant and do some actions. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the letters. Teaching purpose 通过歌曲和 TPR活动， 激发学生的学习兴趣，复习 字母 A到 N，为新授内容做 铺垫。 183 Ss: Oo! Let students read the letter “Oo” after the recording.（出示 课件） T: Can you find something that looks like “Oo” in your daily life? Ss: … （课件出示：呼啦圈、钥匙扣、轮胎、盘子、西瓜、足球、篮球等图片, 并在这些图片上标出 Oo） Write down the letter “Oo” on the blackboard. Let students show their fingers and write after the teacher. Let them pay attention to the capital letter and the lowercase letter. T: “Oo” has many friends. Who are they? Lead in the letters “Pp，Qq，Rr，Ss，Tt” in the same way.（出 示课件） 2. Match the letters. Disorder the capital letter cards and put them up on the blackboard. T: Who can help me put up the lowercase letter cards under the right capital letter cards? Invite some students to the front and finish the matching task. 3. Teach the example words. Show an orange and a box on the PPT. Let students listen to the recording and repeat. （出示课件） T: What similarity can you find between “orange” and “on”? Ss: … T: Excellent! They have the same first letter “o”. What’s the sound? Teaching purpose 强化学生对字母大小写 的区分和记忆。 Teaching purpose 利用课件呈现图片，将 单个的单词串联起来，赋予 故事性和情境性，便于学生 理解和掌握。 Teaching purpose 以猜谜的形式引出字母 Oo，同时将字母拟人化，让 学习变得生动、有趣。引导 学生联想生活中像字母的物 品，培养学生的观察和联想 能力，贴近学生的生活实际。 提醒学生注意区分字母的大 小写，注重对学生学习方法 的指导。 Let students clap their hands and chant: Oo, Oo, Oo, /ɒ/, /ɒ/, /ɒ/. /ɒ/, /ɒ/, orange. /ɒ/, /ɒ/, on. Show the pictures on the PPT and teach the other example words in the same way. (出示课件) 4. Listen, repeat and chant. Play the video of the chant. (课件出示：教材 P50 Listen, repeat and chant 的视频) Let students chant after the video. Lead students to clap their hands and do the actions. Let students practice in groups and show it in class. Give the prize to the best group. Step 3: Practice 1. Listen and circle. Let students look at the pictures and letters carefully. Lead them to predict the listening content and describe the pictures. Then ask students to read all the letters and say the words according to the pictures. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation of the letters. Play the recording, and let students listen and circle. (课 件出示：教材 P50 Listen and circle 的音频) Check the answers on the PPT. (课件出示：教材 P50 Listen and circle 的答案) 2. Can you guess? Let students guess the animals and fill in the blanks. (课件出 示：一些动物被云朵遮住，只露出部分身体的图片和首字母设空的相应单词) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. Play the cartoon. (课件出示：教材 P50 Write and say 的视频) Let students watch it carefully and pay attention to the stroke order, then write down the letters in their books. （Tips：指导学生书写字母时，字母的笔顺、占格情况以及难点字母如 Pp, Qq, Rr 需多加强调。） 2. Pass the ball. (游戏说明:教师将学生分成 A、B 两组，先由 A组的一名学生说一个字母 o，再由 B 组的一名学生以最快的速度说出以 o开头的单词，如：orange。然 后由 B组的一名学生说下一个字母 p，再由 A 组的一名学生说出以 p开头的单 词，如：pig。依次循环，轮流说字母和单词，积分多的那一组将获得奖励。) ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 让学生打着节拍 chant， 增强趣味性的同时还能培养 学生的节奏感。最后，分组 排练并在班级内竞赛展示， 将一般的练习特殊化，更好 地激发学生的学习热情，加 强对字母的掌握。 Teaching purpose 在做听力练习之前，预 留时间让学生对图片加以熟 悉，注重对学生学习方法的 指导。让学生根据图片和提 示猜出动物并补全单词，增 加一定难度，激发学生的挑 战欲望。 Teaching purpose 指导学生注意字母在四 线三格内的笔顺。通过传球 游戏，提高学生的学习热情， 活跃课堂气氛，在游戏中培 养学生的合作竞争意识，同 时强化学生对字母的记忆。 185 ▶作业设计 1. Copy the letters five times. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 教学始终围绕学生的生活实际展开，从生活中寻找和发现字母，降低学生的学习难度，便于学生掌握新 知。 2. 突出学生的主体地位，教师以引导为主，尽可能给学生足够的空间，如让他们通过听例词、读例词、学 例词总结字母在单词中作为首字母时的发音规律。 3. 运用 TPR 教学法，猜谜、传球游戏等多种活动形式调动学生的学习积极性，为学生创造良好的英语学习 氛围。 4. 充分发挥多媒体资源优势，使得例词的教学富有故事性和情景性，吸引学生注意力，激发学生的学习兴 趣。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Letters and sounds · Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Oo, Pp, Qq, Rr, Ss, Tt” and master the pronunciation of the letters as the first letter in words. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak, read and write the letters “Oo, Pp, Qq, Rr, Ss, Tt”. ·Be able to master the pronunciation of the letters“Oo, Pp, Qq, Rr, Ss, Tt”as the first letter in words. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to master the stroke order of the letters and the pronunciation of the example words. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song—ABC song. 3. Revision. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the ABC song. 3. Chant and do the actions with the teacher. Cultivate students’ interest in learning. Help students review the letters that they have learnt and prepare for the new lesson. Presentation 1. Teach the letters. Let students guess a riddle and teach the letter “Oo”. Play the recording of “Oo”. Let students pay attention to the capital letter and the lowercase letter. Teach the letters “Pp, Qq, Rr, Ss, Tt” in the same way. Guess a riddle. Learn the new letters. Read the letters after the recording. Then find things that look like the letters in their daily life. Write the letters with fingers after the teacher. Lead in the letters properly. Cultivate students’ interest in learning and their ability of observation and association. Remind students to distinguish between the capital letters and the lowercase letters. Pay attention to the guidance on their learning methods. 2. Match the letters. Disorder the capital letter cards and put them up on the blackboard. Try to match the capital letters to the lowercase letters. Strengthen students’ distinction and memory of the letters. 3. Teach the example words. Show some pictures on the PPT and teach the example words. Let students clap their hands and chant together. Learn the example words and chant with the teacher. Let students learn the example words in sentences, so that they can understand and master the words better. 4. Listen, repeat and chant. Play the video of the chant. Let students chant after the video. Lead students to clap their hands and do the actions. Watch the video and chant after it. Clap hands and do the actions. Practice in groups and show it in class. Let students sing the chant in rhythm. Elevate students’ learning initiative and train their sense of rhythm. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Listen and circle. Let students look at the pictures and letters carefully. Play the recording and check the answers. Look at the pictures and letters carefully. Predict the listening content and describe the pictures. Then read all the letters and say the words according to the pictures. Pay attention to Let students observe the pictures carefully before listening. Cultivate students’ learning methods and stimulate their 187 the pronunciation of the letters. Listen to the recording and circle the letters. desire to challenge. 2. Can you guess? Let students guess the animals and fill in the blanks. Look at the pictures. Guess the animals and fill in the blanks. Consolidation & Extension 1. Write and say. Play the cartoon of “Write and say”. Watch the cartoon carefully and pay attention to the stroke order, then write down the letters in their books. Lead students to write the letters correctly. Cultivate students’ interest in learning and the sense of cooperation and competition. Strengthen their memory of the letters. 2. Pass the ball. Play the game to practice the letters and the example words. Homework 1. Copy the letters five times. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. The fourth period（第四课时） Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够通过听录音，学会用正确的语音、语调朗读对话，并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够在语境中得体地运用句型“Can I have some…, please?”来表达自己想要的食物 以及运用“You’re welcome.”礼貌地回应别人的谢意 Let’s play ·能够区分“Can I have some…, please?”和“Have some…”这两个句型的不同语用功 能 ▶教学重点 1. 能够理解和掌握本课时的重点单词和句型。 2. 能够在情景中运用句型“Can I have some…, please?” 来表达自己想要的食物以及运用“You’re welcome.”礼貌地回应别人的谢意。 ▶教学难点 能够在真实的语境中运用本课句型自然流利地进行对话。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、句型卡片、人物头饰、教学实物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s sing—I’m hungry. (出示课件) 3. Revision. Show the pictures of “Let’s do” on page 49. (出示课件) T: Let’s chant and do the actions. … Step 2: Presentation 1. Look and think. Show the picture of “Let’s talk” on the PPT. (课件出示：教材 P51 Let’s talk 板块的图片) Let students look at the picture carefully. Ask some questions to help them predict the main idea of the dialogue. 2. Watch and circle. T: Wu Yifan, John and Chen Jie are having a picnic. What food do they have for the picnic? Play the cartoon of “Let’s talk”. (课件出示：教材 P51 Let’s talk 板块的视频) Let students circle the food and drinks in their books. Check the answers. (出示课件) Then teach the words “water, cake” by the word cards. 3. Teach the sentences. (1) Play the cartoon again. (出示课件) T: What would Wu Yifan like? Ss: Water! T: Great! How does he say? Ss: He says, “Can I have some water, please?” Take out the sentence card “Can I have some water, please?” T: Read after me, please. … Write down the sentence “Can I have some water, please?” on the blackboard and teach it by the card. Invite some students to be little teachers to lead other students to read. (2) Put some food on the desk. T: I have some delicious food. Who wants to eat? Come on! What should you say to me? S1: Can I have some…, please? Teaching purpose 以歌曲热身，营造良好 的英语学习氛围，激发学生 的学习兴趣。通过TPR活动， 复习相关句型。 Teaching purpose 通过问题引导学生观察 并讨论图片，借助图片预测 教学内容，培养学生的观察 能力和逻辑推理能力。 Teaching purpose 创设情境自然引出句 型，利用卡片教授句型，简 单直接，学生易于理解。 Teaching purpose 引导学生带着问题观看 动画，整体感知文本，获取 有用信息。 189 T: Here you are. S1: Thank you. T: You’re welcome. Write down the sentence “You’re welcome.” on the blackboard and teach it by the card. Let students practice the sentences in groups. 4. Read and act. (1) Let students read the dialogue after the recording and pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students listen to the whole recording again and repeat, and then practice the dialogue in pairs. (3) Let students wear the headdresses and role-play, and then share it with the class. Step 3: Practice 1. Let’s sing. Lead students to sing the chant with the melody of Twinkle twinkle little star and do the actions. Let students sing in groups and show it to the class. Give the prize to the best group. 2. Let’s play. Show the picture of “Let’s play” on the PPT. (课件出示：教材 P51 Let’s play 板块的图片) Ask students to describe the picture. Teach the words “fish, rice” by word cards. Let students put all the food cards on the desk and practice the dialogue in groups of four. Ask students to make their own dialogues. Give an example: Step 4: Consolidation & Extension “Turn! Turn! Turn!” T: Let’s play a game. Turn! Turn! Turn! Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读，引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调朗读对话，并在 小组中进行角色扮演。 Teaching purpose 自编 chant，将所学重点 句型完美地融合在学生熟悉 的旋律中，增强学生的自信 心，提高其学习积极性。将 学生分组，放上食物图片， 鼓励其创编对话，并在创设 的情境中运用，培养学生的 综合语言运用能力。 Teaching purpose 通过转盘游戏，操练并 巩固重点单词和句型，强化 学生的记忆。 ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 巧妙地将音乐和英语进行了整合，强化学生对重点句型的记忆，培养学生的节奏感和创造力，增强学生 学习英语的自信心，让学生乐于学习。 2. 整个教学过程较清晰流畅，能帮助学生达成既定学习目标。 3. 创设情境教学，让学生在真实的语境中自然流利地运用本节课句型进行对话，培养学生的综合语言运用 能力。 4. 重难点突出，板书精简明了，起到了较好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the picture. 191 · Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. · Be able to use the key sentence structures “Can I have some…, please?” “You’re welcome.” in situations properly. Let’s play · Be able to distinguish the pragmatic functions of the sentence structures “Can I have some…, please?” and “Have some…”. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key words and sentence structures of this lesson. ·Be able to use the key sentence structures “Can I have some…, please?” “You’re welcome.” in situations properly. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to apply the key sentence structures of this lesson to real situations. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Let’s sing—I’m hungry. 3. Revision. Show the pictures of “Let’s do” on page 49. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song. 3. Chant and do the actions with the teacher. Create a good English learning atmosphere and stimulate students’ interest in learning. Presentation 1. Look and think. Show the picture of “Let’s talk”. Let students look at the picture carefully. Ask some questions to help them predict the main idea of the dialogue. Look at the picture carefully. Think and answer the questions to predict the main idea of the dialogue. Lead students to observe and talk about the picture with questions. Cultivate students’ observation and logical reasoning ability. 2. Watch and circle. Ask a question. Play the cartoon. Let students watch the cartoon and circle the food and drinks. Check the answers. Teach the words “water, cake”. Watch the cartoon and circle the food. Learn the words “water, cake” by word cards. Help students get the overall perception of the text and the useful information. 3. Teach the sentences. (1) Play the cartoon again. (2) Put some food on the desk. Learn the sentences. Try to be little teachers to lead other students to read. Practice the sentences in groups. Lead in the new sentences properly. Use the sentence cards to help students learn the sentences easily. 4. Read and act. Play the recording. (1) Read the dialogue after the recording. (2) Listen to the whole recording and repeat. Lead students to read the dialogue correctly and fluently. Activate the atmosphere. Practice the dialogue in pairs. (3) Wear the headdresses and role-play. Then share it with the class. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Let’s sing. Lead students to sing the chant and do the actions. Give the prize to the best group. Sing the chant and do the actions. Then sing the chant in groups and show it to the class. Combine the key sentence structures with the familiar rhythm. Enhance students’ self-confidence. Cultivate students’ comprehensive language using ability by creating dialogues in situations. 2. Let’s play. Show the picture of “Let’s play”. Ask students to describe the picture. Teach the words “fish, rice” by word cards. Give an example. Describe the picture. Learn the words “fish, rice”. Practice the dialogue in groups of four and make their own dialogues according to the example. Consolidation & Extension Play the game “Turn! Turn! Turn!” Turn the turntable and practice the key words and sentence structures. Practice and consolidate the key words and sentence structures. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Sing the chant to your family. 3. Do the exercises. The fifth period（第五课时） Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 193 Let’s learn ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s learn 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够听、说、认读图片中所学的单词“water, cake, fish, rice”,并了解其书写形式 ·能够通过多种活动运用句型“Can I have some…, please?”来表达自己想吃的食物 Let’s do ·能够在图片、动作和音频的帮助下理解、跟读歌谣，强化单词音和义之间的联系 ·能够根据指令做出相应的动作或根据动作说出相应的指令性用语 ▶教学重点 1. 能够听、说、认读单词“water, cake, fish, rice”。 2. 能够在情景中运用句型“Can I have some…, please?”来表达自己想吃的食物。 ▶教学难点 能够在实际生活中自然流利地使用本课句型进行对话。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、教学实物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song with the melody of Twinkle twinkle little star. 3. Revision. T: Now, let’s play the game “I say, you do”. Have some eggs. Have some juice. Eat some bread. Drink some milk… Let students do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the new words. (1) Invite a student to the front. Cover his/her eyes. Give him/her a bottle of water. Let him/her drink and guess. T: What is it? S1: Water. T: Excellent! Have some water! /w/-/ ɔ:/-/t/-/ə(r)/, / /. Teach the word “water” and pass a bottle of water to help students practice the word. Write down the word “water” on the blackboard. (2) Show a riddle on the PPT. Let students guess: What is it? Teaching purpose 师生互动，拉近距离。 利用歌曲热身，激发学生的 学习兴趣，创造良好的英语 学习氛围。复习旧知，帮助 学生尽快投入到课堂中去。 Teaching purpose 利 用 实 物 教 学 单 词 “water”,使学生更易于理解 和掌握。加强单词义和形之 间的联系。 Lead in the word “fish”. T: /f/-/ɪ/-/ ʃ/, /fɪʃ/. Use the word card to teach “fish”. Play a game “High and low voice” to help students practice the word. Write down the word “fish” on the blackboard. (3) Show a riddle on the PPT. Let students guess: What is it? Lead in the word “cake”. T: /k/-/eɪ/-/k/, /keɪk/. Teach the word by the game “Catch the finger”. Write down the word “cake” on the blackboard. (4) Show a riddle on the PPT. Let students guess: What is it? Lead in the word “rice”. T: /r/-/aɪ/-/s/, /raɪs/. Teach the word and play a game “Drive a train” to help students practice the word. Write down the word “rice” on the blackboard. 2. Look and say. Show the picture of “Let’s learn” on the PPT. (课件出示：教 材 P52 Let’s learn 板块的图片) Lead students to observe the picture and talk about it. Ask students to practice the words “cake, fish, rice” in the key sentence structures by replacing the word “water”. 3. Read and act. (1) Play the recording. (课件出示：教材 P52 Let’s learn 板块的 音频) Let students listen carefully and read after the recording, then read freely. (2) Let students practice the dialogue in pairs and then act it out. Step 3: Practice 1. Whack-a-mole. Play the game to consolidate the four words on the PPT. (出示课 件) 2. Let’s chant. T: Look! There is a Food Man. What can you see? Ss: … Teaching purpose 利用猜谜的形式引出新 授单词，吸引学生的注意力， 激发学生的学习兴趣。通过 采用形式多样的游戏活动操 练单词，活跃课堂氛围，有 利于学生掌握新知。 Teaching purpose 通过观察、讨论图片， 并让学生在句型中操练单 词，帮助学生更好地掌握本 课时重点单词及句型。 Teaching purpose 播放录音，学生听录音 跟读，引导学生按照正确的 语音、语调进行朗读。 Teaching purpose 充分利用多媒体教学资 源，用“打地鼠”和“食物 人”的游戏，给学生以视觉 冲击，调动学生的积极性。 195 T: Great! Now let’s chant. 3. Let’s do. (1) I say, you do. Play the cartoon of “Let’s do” for the first time. (课件出示： 教材 P52 Let’s do 板块的视频) Help students get the meaning of it. Play it again. Lead students to do the actions according to the recording. Help students understand the meaning of “cut” by body language. Let students put their pictures or food on their desks. Students do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions. Let students practice in groups and show it to the class. S1: Drink some water. S2: (Do the actions.) … … (2) I do, you say. Play the game in pairs. One student does the actions, and the other student says the sentences. Then let students fill in the blanks! (课 件出示：教材 P52 Let’s do 板块的填空题) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension “We need you!” (1) Create a situation. Show a recruitment notice on the PPT. (出示课件) T: The winter holiday is coming. I need some part-time workers. Do you want to have a try? (2) Play the game. T: Get through the games below and you can work here. 1 Round 1: Read the menu. 2 Round 2: Greet the customers. Choose the correct answers. Teaching purpose 设计“我说你做”和“我 做你说”的活动，调动学生 多种感官参与，激发学生的 学习热情。让学生根据图片 提示补全句子，强化学生对 单词和句型的记忆。 Teaching purpose 以招聘的形式巩固单词 和句型，给学生以耳目一新 的感觉，激发他们的挑战欲 望。变被动学习为主动学习， 让学生在过关的过程中体会 学习英语带来的成就感，增 强学生的自信心，将课堂气 氛推向一个高潮。 3 Round 3: Memory test. Show the pictures on the PPT. Let students look and read carefully. Then make the three pictures disappear. Let students do the matching work. ④Round 4: Do a survey. Divide students into several groups. Let students do a survey about what food “customers” would like. Ask some groups to make a report. （课件出示：调查表格） ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 197 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Do a survey to find out the food and drinks your family like. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 游戏教学贯穿课堂始终，使用多种方式操练单词，如传递实物、大小声、抓手指、开火车、食物人、打 地鼠等，寓教于乐，帮助学生较好较快地掌握新知。 2. 充分利用了多媒体资源辅助教学的优势，猜谜、chant 等活动设计给学生以视觉冲击，吸引学生的注意 力。 3. 教学形式新颖，利用招聘的活动设计，充分调动学生的学习积极性，使他们主动学习并乐于学习，帮助 学生在游戏中获得学习英语带来的成就感，增强学生自信心。 4. 板书设计简洁明了，教学重难点突出。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the picture. · Be able to listen, speak and read the words“water, fish, cake, rice”, and know their writing forms. · Be able to use the sentence structure“Can I have some…, please?”properly in situations.. Let’s do · Be able to understand and sing the chant, strengthen the connection between the pronunciation and the meaning of the words. · Be able to do the corresponding actions according to the instructions or say the corresponding sentences according to the actions. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words “water, fish, cake, rice”. ·Be able to use the sentence structure“Can I have some…, please?”properly in situations. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to apply the key sentence structures of this lesson to real situations. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song with the melody of Twinkle twinkle little star. 3. Revision. Play the game by giving instructions. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song. 3. Do the actions according to the teacher’s instructions. Create a good English learning atmosphere. Help students review the old knowledge and prepare for the following study. Presentation 1. Teach the new words. Show some riddles on the PPT. Let students guess what they are. Teach the words by Drink and guess the liquid in the bottle to learn the word “water”. Guess the riddles to learn the words Lead in the new words properly and teach the words by different games. Help students different games. “fish, cake, rice”. Practice the words by different games. understand and master the words easily. Stimulate students’ interest in learning. 2. Look and say. Show the picture of “Let’s learn” on the PPT. Lead students to observe the picture and talk about it. Observe the picture and talk about it. Practice the words in the key sentence structures. Help students master the key words and sentence structures of this lesson by observing and talking about the picture. Let students practice the words in the key sentence structures. 3. Read and act. Play the recording. Listen and read after the recording, then read freely. Practice the dialogue in pairs and then act it out. Make sure that students can read the words and the dialogue correctly and fluently. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Whack-a-mole. Play the game. Make full use of multimedia resources. Cultivate students’ interest in learning and elevate students’ learning initiative through the game and the chant. 2. Let’s chant. Show a picture of the “Food Man” and chant with students. Look at the picture of the “Food Man”. Talk about the picture. Then chant with the teacher. 3. Let’s do. (1)I say, you do. (2)I do, you say. (1) Do the actions according to the instructions. (2) Say the sentences according to the actions. Attract students’ attention and stimulate their enthusiasm for learning. Strengthen students’ memory of the words and the sentences. Consolidation & “We need you!” (1) Create a situation. Play the game by finishing the tasks. Stimulate students’ desire to challenge. 199 Extension Show a recruitment notice on the PPT. (2) Play the game. Experience the sense of accomplishment from learning. Enhance students’ confidence through the game. Homework 1. Copy the words three times. 2. Do a survey to find out the food and drinks your family like. 3. Do the exercises. The sixth period（第六课时） Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Start to read ·能够找出并听、说、读、写图片中的字母 ·能够听、说、认读本单元的重点单词，并数出对应单词的个数 Let’s check ·能够根据图片信息预测听力考查点，并有意识地去听录音，选出正确的图片 ·能够观察图片，朗读单词，完成配对练习 Let’s sing ·能够听懂、跟唱歌曲，并能创编新的歌曲 ▶教学重点 1. 能够听、说、认读本单元的重点单词。 2. 能够独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习。 ▶教学难点 能够掌握本单元的核心单词和句型。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片、食物图片、食物等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Share the results of the survey. Ask students to share the results of the survey required to be done in last class. 3. Let’s chant. Lead students to chant and do the actions. Teaching purpose 复习字母 A到 T，调动 学生多种感官参与，激发学 生的学习兴趣，为后面的学 习做铺垫。 Step 2: Presentation 1. Find and say. T: Chen Jie has an aquarium. There are some beautiful fish and shells in it. But some naughty letters fell into the aquarium. Can you help her find them out? Show the picture of “Find and say” on the PPT for several seconds. (课件出示:闪现教材 P53 Find and say 的图片) T: What can you see? S1: I see… S2: I see… T: What else? Show the picture on the PPT again for more seconds. （出示课件） S3: I see… S4: I see… Show the picture several times until students find out all the letters. Circle all the letters on the PPT. (出示课件) 2. Choose the cards. Take out all the word cards of “bread, juice, egg, milk, water, cake, fish, rice, King, Queen”. Let students choose the cards. If they choose the “King” or “Queen”, they can get a prize, otherwise, they should read the words three times. 3. Pick the peaches. Let students look at the picture carefully and put the peaches into the right basket. (课件出示：写有食物单词的桃子和写有“eat”和 “drink”的两个篮子) 4. Read and count. T: Now put your cards and pictures of food and drinks on your desks. (1) Invite some students to read the words. When someone reads the word “milk”, the others should show the picture of milk as fast as they can and say “milk, milk, milk” loudly. (2) Invite some students to show the pictures of food or drinks. When someone shows the picture of an egg, the others should show the word card of the egg as fast as they can and say “egg, egg, egg” loudly. (3) Let students count the words. Check the answers on the PPT. (课件出示：教材 P53 Read and count 的答案) Step 3: Practice Teaching purpose 闪现图片，让学生观察 并说出发现的字母，培养学 生的观察能力，吸引学生的 注意力。 Teaching purpose 挑选卡片和摘桃子的游 戏，帮助学生复习关于食物 的单词，并区分食物中“吃 的”和“喝的”。 Teaching purpose 通过形式多样的活动操 练单词，加强学生对单词音、 义、形的记忆。在进一步的 熟悉之后引导学生数出对应 的单词数量，注重对学生学 习方法的指导。 Teaching purpose 在做听力练习之前，预 留时间让学生对所听内容进 行预测和判断，对学生进行 有效的听力技巧指导。 201 1. Listen and tick. (1) Let students look at the pictures in their books by themselves and predict the listening content of every picture. (2) Play the recording. （课件出示：教材 P54 Listen and tick 的 音频）Remind students to grasp the key information. Let students listen to the recording and try to tick the right pictures. (3) Check the answers on the PPT. (课件出示: 教材 P54 Listen and tick 的答案) 2. Look and match. Show the whole content on the PPT. (课件出示: 教材 P54 Look and match 的内容) (1) Cover the words. Let students say the words according to the pictures. (2) Invite some students to read the words. Then let students read the words group by group. (3) Let students match the words to the pictures. Then check the answers. (课件出示:教材 P54 Look and match 的答案) Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Story time. (1) Show the pictures of “Story time”. (课件出示：教材 P55 Story time 的图片) Let students read the story by themselves first. T: Zoom has lunch at the canteen. Is Zoom happy? Why? Ss: … (Students can answer in Chinese.) (2) Let students read the story again. T: What does Zoom order? S1: Some fish. S2: Some rice. … T: You are so clever! Zoom also orders some Coke and ice cream. Teach the pronunciation and the meanings of the words “Coke, ice cream”. T: Do you like Coke? Do you like ice cream? Ss: Yes! (3) Play the cartoon of “Story time”. （课件出示：教材 P55 Story time 的视频）Let students watch the cartoon and read after it. (4) Act out the story. T: Do you like the story? Try to read and act it out. 2. Let’s sing. (1) Play the cartoon for the first time. （课件出示:教材 P54 Let’s sing 板块的视频）Help students get the meaning of it. T: What food or drinks can you see? Ss: Cake, bread, milk… Teaching purpose 先让学生观察图片，自 主阅读，理解故事大意。引 导学生用正确的语音、语调 朗读故事，并能够表演故事。 循序渐进，在故事中巩固核 心句型。 Teaching purpose 鼓励学生运用所学知识 对歌曲进行大胆创编，增强 学生学习英语的自信，活跃 课堂氛围。 (2) Play the cartoon again. Let students learn to sing and practice in groups, then share it with the class. (3) Create your own song. Give an example. Encourage students to create their own songs. Let students sing their own songs. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Sing your own song to your family. 2. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1. 突出学生的主体地位，教师以引导为主，引导学生寻找图片中的字母，引导学生预测听力内容，引导学 生创编新歌曲。尽可能地给学生足够的空间，让他们自己理解和学习。 2. 注重对学生学习方法的指导，包括听的指导、说的指导和练习的指导。 3. 实施单元整体教学，对本单元的重点知识进行梳理。 4. 鼓励学生自主创编歌曲，培养学生的创造能力，增强学生的自信心，让学生体会学习英语带来的乐趣和 成就感。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Start to read · Be able to find as well as listen, speak, read and write the letters in the picture. · Be able to listen, speak and read the key words of this unit and count the words. Let’s check · Be able to predict the examination points according to the pictures and tick the right pictures. · Be able to finish the matching task by observing the pictures and reading the words. Let’s sing · Be able to understand and sing the song, and make a new song. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the key words of this unit. 203 ·Be able to finish the exercises of“Let’s check”independently. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to master the key words and sentence structures of this unit. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Share the results of the survey. 3. Let’s chant. 1. Greetings. 2. Share the results of the survey. 3. Chant together and do the actions. Create a good English learning atmosphere. Review the letters from “A” to “T”. Prepare for the next step. Presentation 1. Find and say. Create a situation. Show the picture several times until students find out all the letters. Circle all the letters on the PPT. Look at the picture carefully and try to find out all the letters. Lead students to observe the picture and find out the letters. Cultivate students’ observation ability. Attract students’ attention. 2. Choose the cards. Take out all the word cards. Let students choose the cards. If they choose the “King” or “Queen”, give them a prize, otherwise, let them read the words three times. Choose the word cards of “bread, juice, egg, milk, water, cake, fish, rice, King, Queen”. If they choose the “King” or “Queen”, they can get a prize, otherwise, they should read the words three times. Review and strengthen the key words. Help students distinguish “drink” and “eat”. 3. Pick the peaches. Show the picture on the PPT. Play the game: Put the peaches into the right basket. 4. Read and count. (1) Invite some students to read the words and the others show the pictures of food or drinks. (2) Invite some students to show the pictures of food or drinks and the others show the word cards and read the words. (3) Check the answers on the PPT. (1) Some students read the words and the others show the pictures of food or drinks. (2) Some students show the pictures of food or drinks and the others show the word cards and read the words. (3) Count the words. Strengthen the memory of the words. Cultivate students’ learning methods. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Listen and tick. (1) Let students look at the pictures in their books by themselves. (2) Play the recording. (3) Check the answers. (1) Look at the pictures carefully. Predict the content of every picture. (2) Listen to the recording and try to tick the right pictures. (3) Check the answers. Train students’ ability of listening. Cultivate students’ learning methods. 2. Look and match. Show the whole content of “Look and match”. (1) Cover the words. Let students say the words according to the pictures. (2) Invite some students to read the words. (3) Let students match the words to the pictures. Then check the answers. (1) Try to say the words according to the pictures. (2) Read the words group by group. (3) Match the words to the pictures. Then check the answers. Consolidation & Extension 1. Story time. (1) Show the pictures of “Story time”. Let students read the story by themselves and ask two questions. (2) Let students read the story again and teach “Coke, ice cream”. (3) Play the cartoon. Let students watch and read after it. (4) Let students read and act out the story. (1) Look at the pictures. Read the story by themselves and try to answer the questions. (2) Read the story again and learn “Coke, ice cream”. (3) Watch the cartoon and read after it. (4) Read and act out the story. Let students observe the pictures and read by themselves first to understand the main idea of the story. Lead students to read the story with correct pronunciation and intonation. Consolidate the key sentence structures in the story. Homework 2. Let’s sing. (1) Play the cartoon. (1) Watch the cartoon and get the meaning of it. Enhance students’ confidence. 205 (2) Play the cartoon again. Let students learn to sing and practice in groups, then share it with the class. (3) Let students create their own songs and sing the songs. (2) Watch the cartoon again. Learn to sing the song. Practice in groups. Then share it with the class. (3) Create their own songs then sing the songs. Stimulate students’ creative desire and cultivate their creative ability. Homework 1. Sing your own song to your family. 2. Do the exercises. Unit 6 Happy birthday! 教材分析 本单元学习的主题是数字。教学内容主要是围绕 Sam 和妈妈在蛋糕店买蛋糕的场景和在 Sam 的生日派对上发生的事来展开的。教学重点是能够听懂、会说核心句型“—How many…? —Five.” “Happy birthday!”“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”；能够听、说、认读单词“one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten”。 教学目标 知识与能力目标: 句型 ·能听懂、会说句型“—How many…? —Five.”“Happy birthday!”“—How old are you? — I’m…years old.” 词汇 ·能听、说、认读单词“one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten” 字母与语音 ·能正确听、说、读、写字母 Uu, Vv, Ww, Xx, Yy, Zz 并知道其在单词中的发音 能力目标： ·能够在图片、实物和教师的帮助下运用“How many…?”询问物品的数量并作答 ·能够在实际情境中运用句型“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”询问年龄并作答 ·用“Happy birthday!”向别人表达生日祝福 ·听到字母能说出其对应的发音 情感态度、文化意识、学习策略目标： ·了解中西文化中谈论年龄话题的差异 ·了解不同国家的幸运数字 ·注意单词音、义、形之间的联系，整体学习单词 课时安排 第一课时: Part A Let’s talk & Count and say 第二课时: Part A Let’s learn & Let’s chant 第三课时: Part A Letters and sounds 第四课时: Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play 第五课时: Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do 第六课时: Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing 207 The first period（第一课时） Part A Let’s talk & Count and say ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够通过听录音，学会用正确的语音、语调朗读对话，并能够在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够在语境中运用句型“How many…?”询问物品的数量 Count and say ·能够用英文数字“1~5”对问句“How many…?”进行回答 ▶教学重点 能够在实际情境中运用句型“How many…?”询问物品的数量。 ▶教学难点 能够熟练运用句型“How many…?”询问物品的数量并进行回答。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、球、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hello, boys and girls! Ss: Hello, Miss/Mr…! T: How are you today? Ss: I’m fine! 2. Enjoy the song—Ten little Indian boys. (出示课件) T: Do you like the song? Ss: Yes. T: How many boys can you see? One? Two? … Ten? (The teacher uses fingers to show the numbers.) Ss: Ten. T: Great! 3. Lead-in. Show the picture of the main scene on page 56 and page 57. （出 示课件）Let students look and answer. T: Look at the picture. How many children can you see? How many candles are there on the cake? Ss: … Teaching purpose 通过歌曲《十个小印第 安人》来热身，活跃课堂氛 围。通过展示主情景图，自 然导入新课。 T: Today we are going to learn numbers. Step 2: Presentation 1. Teach the numbers from one to five and the sentence structure. (1)Show some girls on the PPT. (课件出示：依次出示 1~5 个女孩的 图片) Let students watch and answer. T: Look! What can you see on the PPT? Ss: A girl. T: Yes! One girl. One! Show me your fingers. Say “one” together! One, /wʌn/. Write down the word “one” on the blackboard. Lead students to read while showing their fingers. Let students pay attention to the pronunciation of “girl”: /ɜː/, /ɡɜːl/. T: How many girls now? Show me your fingers. Let’s count together! One! Two! Ss: One! Two! T: Yes! Two girls. /tu:/. Two! Two! Two! Ss: Two! Two! Two! Write down the word “two” on the blackboard. Lead students to practice it in high and low voice. T: How many girls now? Show me your fingers. Let’s count together! One! Two! Three! Ss: One! Two! Three! T: Yes! Three girls. /θ/-/ri:/, /θri:/. Three! Three! Three! Ss: Three! Three! Three! Write down the word “three” on the blackboard. Lead students to practice it by the game “Drive a train”. T: How many girls now? Show me your fingers. Let’s count together! One! Two! Three! Four! Ss: One! Two! Three! Four! T: Yes! Four girls. /f/-/ɔ: (r)/, /fɔ: (r)/. Four! Four! Four! Ss: Four! Four! Four! Write down the word “four” on the blackboard. Lead students to practice it row by row. T: How many girls now? Show me your fingers. Let’s count together! One! Two! Three! Four! Five! Ss: One! Two! Three! Four! Five! T: Yes! Five girls. /f/-/aɪ/-/v/, /faɪv/. Five! Five! Five! Ss: Five! Five! Five! Write down the word “five” on the blackboard. Lead students to practice it line by line. Write down the sentence structure “How many…?” on the blackboard and teach it. Ask students to pay attention to the letter “s” in “girls” of the above sentences. Teaching purpose 通过多种活动，让学生 在观察和游戏中学习数字， 使学生在此过程中轻松学 习目标语言。 209 (2) Bounce the ball. Prepare a ball. Bounce the ball while saying “One! Two! Three! Four! Five!” Let students have a try. T: Who can have a try? Choose several students to come to the front of the classroom to bounce the ball. The other students say the numbers with the rhythm of bouncing the ball. 2. Watch and answer. (1) Show some pictures on the PPT. (课件出示：依次出示一个蛋糕、 Sam 戴生日帽、一个盘子的图片) T: Whose birthday? Ss: Sam’s birthday. T: Look! What’s this? Ss: … T: It’s a plate. Pay attention to the pronunciation of “plate”. Read after me! /pl/-/eɪ/-/t/, /pleɪt/. Students follow the teacher to read. (2) Show the picture of “Let’s talk”. (课件出示：教材 P58 Let’s talk 板块的图片) Let students predict the main idea of the dialogue. T: Sam and his mum are at the baker’s. They need some plates. How many plates? Let’s watch the video and answer the question. Underline the key words in your books. Play the video. (课件出示:教材 P58 Let’s talk 板块的视频) Let students watch and answer. T: How many plates? Ss: Five. (3) Let students listen again. Answer the following questions. T: What does Sam’s mum want? Ss: A cake. T: What does Sam’s mum say? Ss: This one, please. T: What does the shop assistant say? Ss: Sure. How many plates? Explain the meaning and the usage of “sure”. And explain that “one” in the sentence “This one, please.” refers to the cake. Ask students to practice the sentence for several times. 3. Read and act. (1) Let students read after the recording. Remind them to pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the dialogue by themselves. (3) Let students practice the dialogue in groups of three, and then wear the headdresses to act out the dialogue. Step 3: Practice Teaching purpose 通过猜数字的游戏来 激发学生的学习兴趣，并巩 固核心句型以及英文数字 的表达。通过创设情境，让 Teaching purpose 通过观察图片,让学生 预测文本信息，观看视频 并回答问题，激发学生的 好奇心和表达的欲望，同 时培养学生的观察能力和 逻辑思维能力。 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读对话， 并能在小组中进行角色扮 演。 1. Play a game. Let students play a game in pairs. One student takes out some stationery (less than five) and asks “How many…?” The other student tries to guess the number within three times. The one who can guess the correct answer more quickly will be the winner. The teacher makes a model with a student. T: How many pens in my hand? S1: Two. T: No. S1: Four. T: Yes! Let’s exchange! S1: How many pencils in my hand? T: Three. S1: Yes! You win! 2. Count and say. Show the picture of “Count and say”. (课件出示: 教材 P58 Count and say 板块的图片) T: It’s Sam’s birthday today. Look! There are many gifts. What can you see? Ss: Books./Balloons./Pencils./Cards./Crayons… T: How many cakes? Ss: One. T: Now, please ask and answer in pairs. You can ask and answer like this: Step 4: Consolidation & Extension “Let’s go shopping.” Let students work in groups of three. T: It’s Sam’s birthday. Let’s go to buy some gifts for him. OK? Ss: OK. T: One is the shop assistant. The other two students are customers. You can make the dialogue like this: Teaching purpose 通过创设情境来让学 生分小组编对话，既能巩固 本节课的句型和英文数字 单词，也能培养学生的综合 语言运用能力。 211 ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Count the stationery in your schoolbag. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1.活动丰富，且简单易行，较好地活跃了课堂气氛，同时也有效地提升了学生的核心素养。 2.开放性问题的设置能引发学生的好奇心和求知欲，有效提高了课堂效率。 3.利用趣味游戏来提升学生的学习兴趣，让学生沉浸在快乐学英语的氛围中。 4.突出语用功能，帮助学生在真实情境中自然地使用所学语言。 5.板书设计清晰明了，重点突出，对课堂教学起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the picture. ·Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. ·Be able to use the key sentence structure “How many…?” to ask the number of the objects in context. Count and say ·Be able to use the English numbers from one to five to answer the question “How many…?” ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to use the key sentence structure “How many…?” to ask the number of the objects in context. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structure “How many…?” skillfully to ask and answer the number of the objects. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Stages Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy a song. 3. Lead-in. Show the picture of the main scene on page 56 and page 57. Let students look and answer. 1. Greetings. 2. Enjoy the song—Ten little Indian boys. 3. Look at the picture and answer the questions. Stimulate students’ interest in learning through the song and lead in the topic of this lesson properly. Presentation 1. Teach the numbers from one to five and the sentence structure. (1)Show some girls on the PPT. Teach the words and the sentence structure by asking and answering. Ask students to pay attention to the letter “s” in “girls”. (2)Prepare a ball. Ask students to bounce the ball and say the numbers. (1)Count the girls and answer the questions. Learn the words and the sentence structure. (2)Say the numbers with the rhythm of bouncing the ball. Use different ways to lead students to understand and learn the new sentence structure and English numbers. 2. Watch and answer. (1)Show some pictures on the PPT. Ask some questions and teach the word “plate”. (2)Show the picture of “Let’s talk”. Let students predict the main idea of the dialogue. Play the video and ask the question. (3)Play the video again and ask some questions. Teach the meaning and usage of “sure” and “This one, please.” (1)Look at the pictures. Answer the questions and learn the word “plate”. (2)Look at the picture and predict the main idea of the dialogue. Watch the video and answer the question. (3)Listen again and answer the teacher’s questions. Learn the meanings and usage of“sure”and “This one, please.” Practice the sentence. Stimulate students’ curiosity and the desire to express. Cultivate students’ observation and logical thinking ability. 3. Read and act. Play the recording. Read after the recording. Read the dialogue by themselves. Practice in groups of three and act it out. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. 213 Practice 1. Play a game. Make a model with a student. Play a game in pairs by using“How many…?” to ask and answer. Use a game to arouse students’ learning interest. Practice the key words and sentence structure by asking and answering. 2. Count and say. Show the picture of “Count and say” and ask the questions. Answer the questions. Ask and answer in pairs. Consolidation & Extension “Let’s go shopping.” Let students work in groups of three. Show the dialogue on the PPT to make a demonstration for students. Work in groups of three to make a dialogue. One is the shop assistant. The other two students are customers. Consolidate the key words and sentence structure. Develop students’ comprehensive ability of using language. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Count the stationery in your schoolbag. 3. Do the exercises. The second period（第二课时） Part A Let’s learn & Let’s chant ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听辨、会说生活中的“one to five”并了解其书写形式 ·能够在巩固单词音、义的基础上，强化对单词形的认读和记忆 Let’s chant ·能够听懂有节奏、有韵律的歌谣并能够根据歌谣中的指令做出相应的动作 ▶教学重点 能够认读数字“one to five”并能够按歌谣中的指令做出相应的动作。 ▶教学难点 能够在实际情景中灵活运用所学单词。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2.教学课件、课文录音、视频、数字卡片等。。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Hello, boys and girls! Ss: Hi, Miss/Mr…! Good morning/afternoon! T: Good morning/afternoon! … 2. Listen and do. Play the Number song. (出示课件) Let students listen to the song and show their fingers. Do like this: When they hear “one”, they should show one finger. When they hear “two”, they should show two fingers… 3. Magic eyes. T: Boys and girls! Look at the picture. There are many numbers in the picture. Can you find them out quickly? Please point and say in English. S1: I can see “one”. (Point to “1” in the picture.) S2: I can see “two”. (Point to “2” in the picture.) S3: I can see “three”. (Point to “3” in the picture.) Step 2: Presentation 1. Listen and draw. Let students draw some apples according to the teacher’s words. T: I have one apple. Students draw one apple. The teacher writes down “one” on the blackboard. T: I have three apples. Students draw three apples. The teacher writes down “three” on the blackboard. T: I have five apples. Students draw five apples. The teacher writes down “five” on the blackboard. T: I have four apples. Students draw four apples. The teacher writes down “four” on the blackboard. T: I have two apples. Students draw two apples. The teacher writes down “two” on the blackboard. Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 来拉近师生距离，创设愉快 的学习氛围。 Teaching purpose 通过让学生听一听、画 一画 ,快速激发学生的学习 兴趣。 Teaching purpose 通过匹配练习，建立单 词的义、形对应关系，进一 步加深学生对本课重点单词 的理解。 Teaching purpose 教师通过让学生边听数 字歌曲边做动作来巩固学过 的数字单词。 Teaching purpose 用魔术眼的活动来让学 生快速找出图片中存在的数 字，并用英文说出来，以此 来激发学生的挑战欲和学习 积极性。 215 2. Read and match. Show the picture of “Let’s learn” on the PPT. （课件出示：教 材 P59 Let’s learn 板块的图片） T: Now, let’s look at the picture. Read after me, please. One, two, three, four, five. Ss: One, two, three, four, five. T: Great! And then match the numbers to the English words in your textbooks. Check some students’ answers. 3. Look, say and write. Let students look at the things in the classroom. Count and say the numbers, then write them down. T: Numbers are everywhere. Look! How many blackboards? (Point to the blackboard.) Let’s count. Ss: … (Write down the number.) T: How many doors? (Point to the door.) Ss: … (Write down the number.) T: How many lights? (Point to the light.) Ss: … (Write down the number.) … 4. Secret number. Show the cards of numbers from one to five to students. Let some students choose a card as the secret number one by one. The other students guess the secret number. If they can guess it within three times, read it once aloud. If they can’t finish it within three times, read it three times from the low voice to the high voice. T: Look at the card. It’s the secret number. Please try to guess within three times. Let’s begin. 5. Let’s read. (1) Let students read after the recording. Remind them to pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2) Let students read the words by themselves. Step 3: Practice 1. Let’s do. Every student makes some number cards from one to five. Choose some students to the front of the classroom one by one. The students in the front say some instructions and the other students do the corresponding actions according to the instructions quickly. The one who can finish the task quickly and correctly will be the winner. T: Who can come to the front first? S1: Me! T: Please follow him/her. S1: Show me five. Teaching purpose 通过两个不同的游戏来 激发学生的学习兴趣，继续 操练和巩固数字 1~5的英文 表达，并为后面的拓展活动 做铺垫。 Teaching purpose 学生观察教室里的物 品，说出对应的数字，并在 纸上写下相应的英文单词， 以此来巩固学生对数字单词 的读和写。 Teaching purpose 通过玩一个有趣的猜秘 密数字的游戏，提高学生的 学习兴趣，让学生能够更深 刻地记忆数字单词 1~5。 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读单词。 Students show the card “five”. S1: Show me three. Students show the card “three”. T: Who can be the next one? S2: Let me try! Are you ready? Ss: Yes! S2: Show me four. Students show the card “four”. S2: Show me two. Students show the card “two”. … 2. Pair work. Let students work in pairs. One student shows the cards with numbers 1~5. The other student says the words quickly. Then they exchange. The one who spends less time will be the winner. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Let’s chant. (1) Listen and write. Show the picture of “Let’s chant”. (课件出示:教材 P59 Let’s chant 板块的图片) T: Boys and girls! Look at the picture. How many boys can you see? Ss: Two. T: How many girls? Ss: Two. T: How many children? Ss: Four. T: Yes! There are four children. They are jumping a rope. (Do the action of jumping.) Now, please listen to the recording and write down the numbers you hear in order. OK? Play the recording. (课件出示：教材 P59 Let’s chant 板块的音频) Let students listen and write down the numbers in order. (2)Listen, chant and do. T: Follow the chant and do as I do. Students chant after the recording, and do actions as the teacher does. (3)Let’s play. Choose four students to come to the front of the classroom. The four students jump as the other students chant. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 通过师生互动和生生互 动来完成 chant 的学习和指 令动作，以此巩固学生对数 字单词的记忆以及对指令语 言的理解，提升学生的综合 语言运用能力。 217 ▶作业设计 1. Make more number cards. 2Find more numbers in your daily life. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1.结合三年级年龄段学生的特点，设置难度适中的趣味活动，极大地提升了学生的学习兴趣。 2.减少枯燥无味的机械活动，设置一个个与本课学习有关、与学生生活密切相关的任务。 3.让学生在学中玩、玩中学，帮助学生树立学习英语的自信心。 4.注重语言交际能力的培养，让学生在课堂中真正地运用英语，并能将英语用于现实生活中。 5.板书设计简洁清晰，对课堂教学起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn · Be able to recognize and read the numbers from one to five and know their writing forms. · Be able to strengthen the recognition and the memory of the word forms on the basis of consolidating the pronunciation and the meanings of the words. Let’s chant · Be able to understand the chant and do the corresponding actions according to the instructions in the chant. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the five numbers from one to five and do the corresponding actions according to the instructions in the chant. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the words in real situations flexibly. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Listen and do. Play the Number song. 3. Magic eyes. Show a picture on the PPT. 1. Greetings. 2. Listen to the Number song and do actions. 3. Find out the numbers. Point and say in English. Stimulate students’ learning enthusiasm. Review the numbers from one to five. Prepare for the new lesson. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 1. Listen and draw. Let students draw some apples according to the teacher’s words. Draw apples according to the teacher’s words. Arouse students’ learning interest. Create an interesting situation to lead students to understand and learn the five numbers. 2. Read and match. Show the picture of “Let’s learn”. Look at the picture. Match the numbers to the English words. Establish the corresponding relation of the meaning and the form of the words. Let students understand the words better. 3. Look, say and write. Let students look at the things in the classroom and ask by using “How many…?” Look at the things in the classroom. Count and say the numbers, then write them down. Consolidate students’ reading and writing of the five numbers. 4. Secret number. Show the number cards from one to five to students. Choose a card as the secret number one by one. Guess the secret number and read it. Enhance students’ learning of the five numbers. 5. Let’s read. Play the recording. Read after the recording. Read by themselves. Make sure that students can read the words correctly and fluently. Practice 1. Let’s do. Choose some students to come to the front of the classroom one by one. The students in the front of the classroom say some instructions and the other students do the corresponding actions according to the instructions quickly. Use the games to arouse students’ learning interest. Practice the numbers in real situations. Get ready for the next activity.2. Pair work. Ask students to finish the task in pairs. Work in pairs. One student shows the cards with numbers 1~5 and the other student says the words quickly. Then exchange. 219 Consolidation & Extension Let’s chant. (1)Show the picture of “Let’s chant” and ask some questions. Play the recording. (2)Do the actions. (3)Choose four students to come to the front of the classroom. (1)Look at the picture and answer the questions. Listen to the recording and write down the numbers they hear in order. (2)Chant after the recording and do actions as the teacher does. (3)The four students jump as the other students chant. Use the TPR activity to develop students’ comprehensive ability of using language. Strengthen the memory of the words and the understanding of the sentences. Homework 1. Make more number cards. 2. Find more numbers in your daily life. 3. Do the exercises. The fourth period（第四课时） Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够用正确的语音、语调朗读对话,并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够在语境中运用句型“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”谈论年龄 ·能够在语境中理解“brother”和“Happy birthday!”的意思 Let’s play ·巩固句型“—How old are you? —I’m… years old.”以及复习句型“—What’s your name?—I’m…” ▶教学重点 能够理解并掌握核心句型“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”。 ▶教学难点 能够在语境中熟练运用句型“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”谈论年龄。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Good morning/afternoon, boys and girls! Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 来拉近师生距离，创设轻松 愉悦的学习氛围，同时通过 询问学生的姓名以及同学之 间相互介绍来复习句型“— What’ s your name?— I’ m…”以及“This is…”，为 Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss/Mr…! T: What’s your name? S1: I’m… T: What’s your name? S2: I’m… … T: Now, please introduce your classmates in groups. Students use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce their classmates in groups. 2. Play a game—What’s missing? T: Let’s play a game. Please read the number which is missing quickly one by one! (课件出示：单词 one ~ five 依次消失) 3. Lead-in. （课件出示：Sam 头戴生日帽的图片） T: Look! This is Sam. It’s Sam’s birthday! Let’s sing the song Happy birthday! for Sam. OK? Ss: OK! Play the song Happy birthday! (出示课件) Let students sing the song together. Explain the meaning of “Happy birthday!” and teach how to use it in situations. Let students practice the sentence several times in pairs. Step 2: Presentation 1. Look and predict. Show the pictures of “Let’s talk”. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块的图片) Let students predict the main idea of the dialogue. T: Look at the pictures. What are they talking about？ Ss: Birthday. T: Whose birthday? Ss: … 2. Listen and learn. (1)T: Please listen and answer. Sam is Sarah’s… Play the recording of the first sentence of “Let’s talk”. (课 件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块第一句的音频) Let students listen and try to answer. Ss: Sam is Sarah’s brother. Teach the pronunciation of “brother” several times. Let students practice “brother” from the low voice to the high voice. (2)T: Look at Picture 1 carefully. What does John give Sam? Ss: A birthday card. T: How does John congratulate Sam? Let’s listen. Play the recording of Picture 1. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块图一的音频) Ss: Happy birthday! Teaching purpose 引导学生观察并讨论图 片，借助图片预测教学内容， 培养学生的观察能力和逻辑 思维能力。 Teaching purpose 通过不同的听力活动来 降低该部分的学习难度。 Teaching purpose 通过游戏复习英文数字 1~5。 Teaching purpose 创设情境，让学生学唱 生 日 歌 来 理 解 “ Happy birthday!”的语义以及其使 用场景。 221 Teach students how to use “Happy birthday!” and “Thank you.” in real life. (3) Listen and choose. T: How old is Sam? Let’s listen and choose. Play the recording of Picture 2. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块图二的音频) Let students listen to the recording and try to choose the right answer. Ss: B. T: Good job! Sam is six years old. Six, / ɪ/, /sɪks/. 3. Look and answer. （课件出示：7~10 岁儿童的照片依次出现，年龄用蛋糕上蜡烛的数量来 表示） T: Now you are the kid. (Point to the seven-year-old kid.) How old are you? S1: 七岁。 T: Yes. You’re seven years old. (Point to the eight-year-old kid.) How old are you? S2: 八岁。 T: Yes. You’re eight years old. (Point to the nine-year-old kid.) How old are you? S3: 九岁。 T: Yes. You’re nine years old. (Point to the ten-year-old kid.) How old are you? S4: 十岁。 T: Yes. You’re ten years old. Help students know the words “seven, eight, nine, ten”. Teach students the meaning of the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” and how to use them in real situations. Lead students to practice them in pairs. 4. Read and act. (1)Let students read after the recording. Remind them to pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2)Let students read the dialogue by themselves. Teaching purpose 初步感知数字 7~10，为 后面的游戏环节做准备。 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读对话， 并能在小组中进行角色扮 演。 (3)Let students practice the dialogue in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out the dialogue. Step 3: Practice 1. Let’s play. Play the video of “Let’s play”. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s play 板块的视频) Let students watch the video and make their own dialogues in pairs, and then show in the front of the classroom. For example: Then exchange in pairs to ask and answer. 2. Pair work. Let students work in pairs. One student writes five numbers on five cards. The other student writes five names on five cards. Let students play the game according to the video of “Let’s play”. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Finish the dialogue and practice. T: Boys and girls. Peppa Pig, George and their friends are at the birthday party. (课件出示：相关图片) Now please finish the following dialogue and practice in groups of four. 2. Let’s think. T: Boys and girls. You have done a very good job. I have a question. How old is Peppa’s mother? Think it over. Ss: … T: Remember, it is not polite to ask an adult’s age in western countries, especially a woman’s. ▶板书设计 Teaching purpose 通过观看视频对话来创 编新的对话并通过卡片模仿 视频内容来做游戏，操练和 巩固核心词汇及句型。 Teaching purpose 通过创设小猪佩奇的弟 弟乔治过生日邀请朋友来参 加派对的趣味情境，让学生 学会在真实的语境中运用本 节课所学的句型。既能提升 学生的综合语言运用能力， 同时也能渗透中西方文化差 异。 223 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a new dialogue. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1.活动设计丰富，符合三年级学生的年龄特点和认知水平，有效地提升了学生的学习效率。 2.分解课文文本的知识难度，增强了学生的学习自信心。 3.趣味活动的加入让学生真正地体会到了英语学习的乐趣。 4.创设多个情境，逐步呈现新知，让学生在实际情境中感知、学习并操练新知。 5.板书设计一目了然，重点突出，对课堂教学起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the pictures. ·Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. ·Be able to talk about ages by using the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” ·Be able to understand the meanings of“brother”and“Happy birthday!”in context. Let’s play ·Consolidate the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” and review the sentence structures “—What’s your name?—I’m…” ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” skillfully in context to talk about ages. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Play a game—What’s missing? 3. Lead-in. Play the song Happy birthday! Explain the meaning of “Happy birthday!” and teach how to use it in situations. 1. Greetings. 2. Read the number which is missing quickly one by one. 3. Sing the song together. Learn the sentence “Happy birthday!” Create a pleasant learning environment. Use a song and a game to review the sentence structures and the words. Prepare for the following study. Lead in the sentence “Happy birthday!” properly. Presentation 1. Look and predict. Show the pictures of “Let’s talk”. Let students predict the main idea of the dialogue. Look at the pictures and predict the main idea of the dialogue. Lead students to observe and talk about the pictures. Cultivate students’ observation and logical thinking ability. 2. Listen and learn. (1)Play the recording. Teach the pronunciation of the new word “brother” several times. (2)Play the recording. Ask some questions to teach the sentences “Happy birthday!” and “Thank you.” (3)Listen and choose. Play the recording and show a question on the PPT. Teach the word “six”. (1)Listen to the recording and learn the word “brother”. Practice the word from the low voice to the high voice. (2)Listen and answer the questions. Learn to use “Happy birthday!” and “Thank you.” in real life. (3)Listen to the recording. Choose the right answer and learn the word “six”. Use different listening activities to make it easier to learn the words and the key sentence structures. 3. Look and answer. Show the pictures and ask the question “How old are you?” Answer the question. Learn the words from seven to ten simply. Perceive the words from seven to ten. Get prepared for the following game. 4. Read and act. Play the recording. Read after the recording. Read the dialogue by themselves. Practice the dialogue in groups and act it out. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. 225 （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Let’s play. Play the video of “Let’s play” and give an example. Watch the video and make their own dialogues in pairs. Then show in the front of the classroom. Set the situation, and let students learn the new words in situations and perceive the new sentence structures. 2. Pair work. Let students work in pairs. One student writes five numbers on five cards. The other student writes five names on five cards. Then play the game according to the video of “Let’s play”. Practice the key words and sentence structures through making dialogues and playing the card game. Consolidation & Extension 1. Create a situation. Show the dialogue with some blanks. Ask students to finish and practice. Finish the dialogue and practice in groups of four. Create an interesting situation to develop students’ comprehensive ability of using language. Cultivate students’ interest in learning and the awareness of the differences between Chinese and Western cultures. 2. Let’s think. Remember that it is not polite to ask an adult’s age in western countries, especially a woman’s. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a new dialogue. 3. Do the exercises. The fourth period（第四课时） Part B Let’s talk & Let’s play ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s talk ·能够通过观察、谈论 Let’s talk 板块的图片，并在 PPT 和教师的帮助下理解对话大意 ·能够用正确的语音、语调朗读对话,并能在小组中进行角色扮演 ·能够在语境中运用句型“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”谈论年龄 ·能够在语境中理解“brother”和“Happy birthday!”的意思 227 Let’s play ·巩固句型“—How old are you? —I’m… years old.”以及复习句型“—What’s your name?—I’m…” ▶教学重点 能够理解并掌握核心句型“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”。 ▶教学难点 能够在语境中熟练运用句型“—How old are you? —I’m…years old.”谈论年龄。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision & Lead-in 1. Greetings. T: Good morning/afternoon, boys and girls! Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss/Mr…! T: What’s your name? S1: I’m… T: What’s your name? S2: I’m… … T: Now, please introduce your classmates in groups. Students use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce their classmates in groups. 2. Play a game—What’s missing? T: Let’s play a game. Please read the number which is missing quickly one by one! (课件出示：单词 one ~ five 依次消失) 3. Lead-in. （课件出示：Sam 头戴生日帽的图片） T: Look! This is Sam. It’s Sam’s birthday! Let’s sing the song Happy birthday! for Sam. OK? Ss: OK! Play the song Happy birthday! (出示课件) Let students sing the song together. Explain the meaning of “Happy birthday!” and teach how to use it in situations. Let students practice the sentence several times in pairs. Step 2: Presentation 1. Look and predict. Show the pictures of “Let’s talk”. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块的图片) Let students predict the main idea of the dialogue. T: Look at the pictures. What are they talking about？ Ss: Birthday. T: Whose birthday? Ss: … Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 来拉近师生距离，创设轻松 愉悦的学习氛围，同时通过 询问学生的姓名以及同学之 间相互介绍来复习句型“— What’ s your name?— I’ m…”以及“This is…”，为 之后的学习做准备。 Teaching purpose 引导学生观察并讨论图 片，借助图片预测教学内容， 培养学生的观察能力和逻辑 思维能力。 Teaching purpose 通过游戏复习英文数字 1~5。 Teaching purpose 创设情境，让学生学唱 生 日 歌 来 理 解 “ Happy birthday!”的语义以及其使 用场景。 2. Listen and learn. (1)T: Please listen and answer. Sam is Sarah’s… Play the recording of the first sentence of “Let’s talk”. (课 件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块第一句的音频) Let students listen and try to answer. Ss: Sam is Sarah’s brother. Teach the pronunciation of “brother” several times. Let students practice “brother” from the low voice to the high voice. (2)T: Look at Picture 1 carefully. What does John give Sam? Ss: A birthday card. T: How does John congratulate Sam? Let’s listen. Play the recording of Picture 1. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块图一的音频) Ss: Happy birthday! Teach students how to use “Happy birthday!” and “Thank you.” in real life. (3) Listen and choose. T: How old is Sam? Let’s listen and choose. Play the recording of Picture 2. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s talk 板块图二的音频) Let students listen to the recording and try to choose the right answer. Ss: B. T: Good job! Sam is six years old. Six, / ɪ/, /sɪks/. 3. Look and answer. （课件出示：7~10 岁儿童的照片依次出现，年龄用蛋糕上蜡烛的数量来 表示） T: Now you are the kid. (Point to the seven-year-old kid.) How old are you? S1: 七岁。 T: Yes. You’re seven years old. (Point to the eight-year-old kid.) How old are you? S2: 八岁。 T: Yes. You’re eight years old. (Point to the nine-year-old kid.) How old are you? S3: 九岁。 T: Yes. You’re nine years old. (Point to the ten-year-old kid.) How old are you? Teaching purpose 通过不同的听力活动来 降低该部分的学习难度。 Teaching purpose 初步感知数字 7~10，为 后面的游戏环节做准备。 229 S4: 十岁。 T: Yes. You’re ten years old. Help students know the words “seven, eight, nine, ten”. Teach students the meaning of the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” and how to use them in real situations. Lead students to practice them in pairs. 4. Read and act. (1)Let students read after the recording. Remind them to pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2)Let students read the dialogue by themselves. (3)Let students practice the dialogue in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out the dialogue. Step 3: Practice 1. Let’s play. Play the video of “Let’s play”. (课件出示：教材 P61 Let’s play 板块的视频) Let students watch the video and make their own dialogues in pairs, and then show in the front of the classroom. For example: Then exchange in pairs to ask and answer. 2. Pair work. Let students work in pairs. One student writes five numbers on five cards. The other student writes five names on five cards. Let students play the game according to the video of “Let’s play”. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Finish the dialogue and practice. T: Boys and girls. Peppa Pig, George and their friends are at the birthday party. (课件出示：相关图片) Now please finish the following dialogue and practice in groups of four. Teaching purpose 通过观看视频对话来创 编新的对话并通过卡片模仿 视频内容来做游戏，操练和 巩固核心词汇及句型。 Teaching purpose 通过创设小猪佩奇的弟 弟乔治过生日邀请朋友来参 加派对的趣味情境，让学生 学会在真实的语境中运用本 节课所学的句型。既能提升 学生的综合语言运用能力， 同时也能渗透中西方文化差 异。 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读对话， 并能在小组中进行角色扮 演。 2. Let’s think. T: Boys and girls. You have done a very good job. I have a question. How old is Peppa’s mother? Think it over. Ss: … T: Remember, it is not polite to ask an adult’s age in western countries, especially a woman’s. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a new dialogue. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1.活动设计丰富，符合三年级学生的年龄特点和认知水平，有效地提升了学生的学习效率。 2.分解课文文本的知识难度，增强了学生的学习自信心。 3.趣味活动的加入让学生真正地体会到了英语学习的乐趣。 4.创设多个情境，逐步呈现新知，让学生在实际情境中感知、学习并操练新知。 5.板书设计一目了然，重点突出，对课堂教学起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s talk · Be able to understand the main idea of the dialogue by observing and talking about the pictures. ·Be able to read the dialogue with correct pronunciation and intonation and act it out in groups. ·Be able to talk about ages by using the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” 231 ·Be able to understand the meanings of“brother”and“Happy birthday!”in context. Let’s play ·Consolidate the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” and review the sentence structures “—What’s your name?—I’m…” ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to understand and master the key sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to use the sentence structures “—How old are you? —I’m…years old.” skillfully in context to talk about ages. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision & Lead-in 1. Greetings. 2. Play a game—What’s missing? 3. Lead-in. Play the song Happy birthday! Explain the meaning of “Happy birthday!” and teach how to use it in situations. 1. Greetings. 2. Read the number which is missing quickly one by one. 3. Sing the song together. Learn the sentence “Happy birthday!” Create a pleasant learning environment. Use a song and a game to review the sentence structures and the words. Prepare for the following study. Lead in the sentence “Happy birthday!” properly. Presentation 1. Look and predict. Show the pictures of “Let’s talk”. Let students predict the main idea of the dialogue. Look at the pictures and predict the main idea of the dialogue. Lead students to observe and talk about the pictures. Cultivate students’ observation and logical thinking ability. 2. Listen and learn. (1)Play the recording. Teach the pronunciation of the new word “brother” several times. (2)Play the recording. Ask some questions to teach the sentences “Happy birthday!” and “Thank you.” (3)Listen and choose. Play the recording and show a question on the PPT. Teach the word “six”. (1)Listen to the recording and learn the word “brother”. Practice the word from the low voice to the high voice. (2)Listen and answer the questions. Learn to use “Happy birthday!” and “Thank you.” in real life. (3)Listen to the recording. Choose the right answer and learn the word “six”. Use different listening activities to make it easier to learn the words and the key sentence structures. 3. Look and answer. Show the pictures and ask the question “How old are you?” Answer the question. Learn the words from seven to ten simply. Perceive the words from seven to ten. Get prepared for the following game. 4. Read and act. Play the recording. Read after the recording. Read the dialogue by themselves. Practice the dialogue in groups and act it out. Make sure that students can read the dialogue correctly and fluently. 233 （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Practice 1. Let’s play. Play the video of “Let’s play” and give an example. Watch the video and make their own dialogues in pairs. Then show in the front of the classroom. Set the situation, and let students learn the new words in situations and perceive the new sentence structures. 2. Pair work. Let students work in pairs. One student writes five numbers on five cards. The other student writes five names on five cards. Then play the game according to the video of “Let’s play”. Practice the key words and sentence structures through making dialogues and playing the card game. Consolidation & Extension 1. Create a situation. Show the dialogue with some blanks. Ask students to finish and practice. Finish the dialogue and practice in groups of four. Create an interesting situation to develop students’ comprehensive ability of using language. Cultivate students’ interest in learning and the awareness of the differences between Chinese and Western cultures. 2. Let’s think. Remember that it is not polite to ask an adult’s age in western countries, especially a woman’s. Homework 1. Practice the dialogue of “Let’s talk”. 2. Make a new dialogue. 3. Do the exercises. The fifth period（第五课时） Part B Let’s learn & Let’s do ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Let’s learn ·能够听、说、认读数字单词“six, seven, eight, nine, ten” ·能够用“I’m…years old.”表达年龄 235 Let’s do ·能够听懂指令语并做出相应的动作 ▶教学重点 能够听、说、认读数字单词“six, seven, eight, nine, ten”。 ▶教学难点 能够读准单词“seven, eight, nine”的发音。。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、人物头饰、包、文具、礼物盒等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1: Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. T: Good morning, boys and girls! Ss: Good morning, Miss/Mr…! … 2. Sing a song. Play a song—Ten little Indian boys. (出示课件) Let students follow it to sing. 3. Guess and say. Take out a bag with some stationery in it. Let students guess the amount of them. T: Look! I have a bag. What’s in it? Ss: Pens, pencils… T: How many pens? Try to guess. You can guess within three times. S1: Four. T: Sorry. S2: Three. T: Sorry. S3: Five. T: Sorry. Six pens! (Show the six pens to students.) T: How many pencils? S4: … S5: … S6: … T: Great! You did it! … Step 2: Presentation 1. Learn the English numbers from six to ten (1)Show a picture of a birthday party on the PPT. (课件出示：生 日聚会及一些礼物盒的图片) T: It’s XXX’s birthday today. He / She gets many gifts. What are these gifts? Let’s go and have a look. Teaching purpose 通过师生间的情景对话 来拉近师生距离，歌曲营造 愉快的学习氛围，游戏活跃 课堂气氛，既能让学生复习 之前学过的五个数字单词， 又能让学生提前感知即将要 学习的数字单词。 Teaching purpose 创设趣味情境，让学生 在具体的语境中体验和学习 新的单词和句型，既提升学 生的学习积极性，同时也提 高学生的学习效率。 Take out a real gift box. T: What’s this? Ss: It’s a box. T: Yes, you are right. It’s a box. What’s in it? Let’s have a look. Take out a crayon from the box. And then talk with students. T: Look! What’s this? Ss: It’s a crayon. T: Great! It’s a crayon. (Take out some crayons.) One crayon, two crayons, three crayons, blue crayons, black crayons, yellow crayons… So many crayons! Let’s count together. One, two, three, four, five… Ss: One, two, three, four, five… T: Six! S I X, /sɪks/. Follow me. (Teach the pronunciation and the writing of “six”.) Show me your fingers. Let’s practice “six” from the low voice to the high voice for four times. Use the same way to lead in the numbers from seven to ten. Then write down the words on the blackboard. Teach students how to pronounce and write the words correctly. (2)Show the headdresses of Li Li, Tom, Kate, Lu Yao and Lucy. Lead students to use “This is…” to introduce them. At the same time, let students say hello to them one by one. (3)Show the picture of a cake with six candles. (出示课件) Wear the headdress of Li Li. T: I am Li Li. I’m six years old. Use the picture to lead students to understand the meaning of this expression “…year/years old”. Then let students practice it for several times. Choose five students to wear the five characters’ headdresses. Ask them to introduce themselves by using “I’m… I’m…years old.” Then let students practice the sentence structures in pairs. 2. Read and act. (1)Let students read after the recording. Remind them to pay attention to the pronunciation and the intonation. (2)Let students read the sentence and the words by themselves. (3)Let students practice the sentence and the words in groups, and then wear the headdresses to act out. Step 3: Practice 1. Pass on the message. Divide the whole class into five groups. Let the five groups pass on the sentences “I am six/seven/eight/nine/ten years old.” from the first student to the last student. The group which passes on the sentence most quickly and correctly will be the winner. 2. Let’s do. Teaching purpose TPR教学法可以有效地 活跃课堂氛围，并检测学生 对指令语的理解程度。 Teaching purpose 通过分享 的制作 过程让学生对本课的学习内 容更加感兴趣。利用 教学方法可以营造轻松愉快 的课堂气氛，更好地调动学 Teaching purpose 教师播放录音，学生听 录音跟读。引导学生按照正 确的语音、语调朗读句子和 单词，并能在小组中进行角 色扮演。 237 (1) Watch and follow. Play the video of “Let’s do” for the first time. (课件出示： 教材 P62 Let’s do 板块的视频) Let students point to the pictures in the textbook according to the recording and help them get the meanings of these sentences. Play it again, and let all the students stand up. Ask them to do as it does in the video. Then teach students how to show the numbers from six to ten with their fingers. (2) Listen and do. Play the recording of “Let’s do”. （课件出示：教材 P62 Let’s do 板块的音频）Let students do the actions according to the recording. (3) Listen and point. Disrupt the sentences of the pictures of this section on the PPT. (出示课件) Give instructions and let students point to the right pictures. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension Play games. (1) Show some numbers in our daily life on the PPT. (出示课件) Such as phone numbers, room numbers, car numbers, school numbers and so on. Let students read aloud the numbers they see quickly. (2) Say and compete. Ask students to show the last four numbers of their parents’ phone numbers. Then compete in groups of four. The one who can say the numbers within the shortest time will be the winner. ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Read your family members’ phone numbers aloud. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) ▶教学反思 1.活动设计符合三年级学生的年龄特点和认知水平，有效地提升了学生学习的积极性。 2.创设情境，逐步呈现新知，让学生在实际情境中感知、学习新知。 3.游戏能极大地提升学生的学习兴趣，让学生真正地体会到英语学习的乐趣。 4.TPR 教学法极大地活跃了课堂气氛，让学生真正地手动、口动、全身动。 5.板书设计一目了然，重点突出，对课堂教学起到了很好的辅助作用。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Let’s learn Teaching purpose 游戏可以极大提升学生 的学习热情，真正地让学生 在“学中玩，玩中学”，同时 也能巩固英文数字的熟练表 达。 · Be able to listen, speak and read the words “six, seven, eight, nine, ten”. · Be able to use the sentence structure “I’m…years old.” to express the age. Let’s do ·Be able to understand the instructions and do the corresponding actions. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words “six, seven, eight, nine, ten”. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to master the pronunciation of the words “seven, eight, nine”. ▶Teaching Procedures 239 Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Sing a song. Play a song—Ten little Indian boys. 3. Guess and say. Take out a bag with some stationery in it and ask the questions. 1. Greetings. 2. Sing the song. 3. Guess the amount of the stationery in the bag. Use a song to stimulate students’ interest in learning and review the numbers they have learned before. Then lead in the new lesson. Presentation 1. Learn the English numbers from six to ten. (1)Show a picture of a birthday party on the PPT. Take out a box with some crayons in it. Teach the words from six to ten through counting the crayons. (2)Show the headdresses of Li Li, Tom, Kate, Lu Yao and Lucy. Lead students to use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce them. (3)Show the picture of a cake with six candles. Wear the headdress of Li Li and introduce the age. Teach the expression “…year/years old”. Choose five students to wear the five characters’ headdresses. (1)Look and answer. Learn the numbers from six to ten and practice. (2)Say hello to the characters and use the sentence structure “This is…” to introduce them. (3)Learn and practice the sentence structures “I’m… I’m…years old.” Create an interesting environment to lead students to learn the numbers from six to ten as well as the new sentence structures. Increase students’ interest in learning and enhance their learning efficiency. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 2. Read and act. Play the recording. Read after the recording. Read the sentence and the words by themselves. Practice the sentence and the words in groups and act out. Make sure that students can read the sentence and the words correctly and fluently. Practice 1. Pass on the message. Divide the whole class into five groups. Let the five groups pass on the sentences “I am six/ seven/eight/nine/ten years old.” from the first student to the last student. Pass on the sentences “I am six/seven/eight/nine/ten years old.” from the first student to the last student. TPR teaching method is used to build an interesting learning environment and practice the new words and sentences. 2. Let’s do. (1)Play the video of “Let’s do”. Teach students how to show the numbers from six to ten with their fingers. (2)Play the recording of “Let’s do”. (3)Disrupt the sentences of the pictures of this section on the PPT. Give instructions. (1)Stand up and do actions according to the video. Learn how to show the numbers from six to ten with their fingers. (2)Do actions according to the recording. (3)Point to the right pictures according to the teacher’s instructions. Consolidation & Extension Play games. (1)Show some numbers in our daily life on the PPT. (2)Ask students to show the last four numbers of their parents’ phone numbers. (1)Read aloud the numbers they see quickly. (2)Show the last four numbers of their parents’ phone numbers. Then compete in groups of four by reading the numbers quickly and correctly. Use games to develop students’ comprehensive ability of using English numbers. Cultivate students’ interest in learning. Homework 1. Practice the words and the sentences. 2. Read your family members’ phone numbers aloud. 3. Do the exercises. The sixth period（第六课时） 241 Part B Start to read & Let’s check & Let’s sing ▶教学内容与目标 课时教学内容 课时教学目标 Start to read ·能够找出并能听、说、读、写图片中的字母 ·能够整体认读单词，在单词的形和义之间建立联系 Let’s check ·能够独立完成该板块的练习 ·能够听、说、认读所学的有关数字的英文单词 Let’s sing ·能够听懂、跟唱歌曲，并能创编新的歌曲 ▶教学重点 1. 能够掌握所学字母和有关数字的英文单词。 ▶教学难点 能够独立完成 Let’s check 板块的练习。 ▶教学准备 1.预习《状元大课堂》《创优作业 100 分》《状元作业本》中本课时的相关内容。 2. 教学课件、课文录音、视频、单词卡片等。 ▶教学过程 Step 1：Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. T: Good morning/afternoon, boys and girls! Ss: Good morning/afternoon, Miss/Mr…! T: How are you? Ss: I’m fine. … 2. Listen and do. Give instructions and let students do the actions with their fingers. T: Show me one with your fingers! Students show one with their fingers. T: Show me three! Students show three with their fingers. Choose one student to give instructions. The other students do actions according to the instructions. S1: Show me ten! Teaching purpose 通过师生间的相互问候 来拉近师生距离。TPR活动 和歌曲营造愉快、活跃的学 习氛围，同时也对所学字母 及数字单词进行复习巩固。 Students show ten with their fingers. … 3. Enjoy a song—ABC song. （出示课件） T: Let’s sing the ABC song together. Clap your hands, please! Step 2: Presentation 1. Look and say. (1)Magic eyes. (课件出示：闪现活泼可爱的字母图形 Uu ~ Zz) T: Boys and girls! Please read aloud the letters quickly. (2)Find and say. (课件出示：教材 P63 Find and say 的图片) Let students look at the picture and find out the letters. Try to find out the most letters. T: Look！ It’s a room. We can see many things. There are many letters, too. Wow! I see a big X. (Point to the letter “X”.) What letters do you see? Ss: I see… Ask students to count the letters. T: How many big U/V/W/X/Y/Z do you see? (Point to the letters and ask.) Ss: … T: How many small u/v/w/x/y/z do you see? (Point to the letters and ask.) Ss: … 2. Count and match. (1)Count from one to ten. Let students work in groups of ten, and then count from one to ten one by one. The group that spends the least time will be the winner. For example: S1: One! S2: Two! S3: Three! … S10: Ten! (2)Find, tick and match. Show the picture of “Find, tick and match”. (课件出示:教材 P63 Find, tick and match 的图片) Explain the meaning of the exercise. Make a demonstration first. T: Look at this goose. (Point to the second goose.) What number do you see? Ss: 2. T: Very good! Teaching purpose 利用多种方式复习和巩 固所学字母。 Teaching purpose 先通过让学生报数的方 式巩固所学过的数字单词， 再通过打勾并连线的方式来 检测学生对数字单词的掌握 情况。 243 Tick the number “two” and match it to the second goose. Then let students tick and match by themselves. Check the answers together. (出 示课件) Step 3: Practice Let’s check. (1)Listen and tick or cross. (课件出示：教材 P64 Listen and tick or cross 的图片)Ask some questions to lead them to observe the pictures. T: What can you see in the pictures? S1: I can see a cake. S2: I can see some cats. … T: How many cakes? How many cats? Let’s listen and tick or cross. Play the recording and let students finish the exercise. (课件 出示: 教材 P64 Listen and tick or cross 的音频) Show the listening material to check the answers. (课件出示： 教材 P64 Listen and tick or cross 的听力材料及答案) (2)Look and circle. (课件出示：教材 P64 Look and circle 的图片) Let students look at the picture and count the number of the things in the picture. Then ask them to finish the exercise by themselves. T: Look! What do you see? S1: I see monkeys. S2: I see pencils. S3: I see rulers. … T: Well done! Now, please count the number of them and circle the right numbers. Step 4: Consolidation & Extension 1. Story time. (1)Show the pictures of “Story time”. (课件出示：教材 P65 Story time 的图片) Let students read the story by themselves first. T: What’s the story about? Ss: Birthday. T: Whose birthday? Ss: Zoom’s birthday. Let students read the story again. T: How many candles can you see on the cake? Ss: Six. T: How old is Zoom? Ss: He is six. T: You are so clever! Now look at Picture 3. What do Zoom’s friends say to Zoom? Teaching purpose 复习并巩固核心句型， 同时渗透西方文化。 Teaching purpose 通过不同的活动来锻炼 学生的听、说、认读的能力， 并再一次操练和巩固数字单 词的形、义联系。 Ss: Happy birthday! Simply introduce the western culture about birthday surprises. Ask students to talk about it. (2)Act out the story. T: Do you like the story? Try to read and act it out. 2. Let’s sing. （1）Play the song—Ten little candles. (课件出示：教材 P64 Let’s sing 板块的歌曲) Lead students to show their fingers and sing with the video. Let them practice in groups. Invite some students to sing in the front of the classroom, and the others sing and show fingers with them. （2）Make a new song. Let students try to make a new song. Make a model: ▶板书设计 ▶作业设计 1. Sing the number song to your family members. 2. Retell the story of “Story time”. 3. Do the exercises. (见“状元成才路”系列丛书《创优作业 100 分》或《状元作业本》对应课时作业) Teaching purpose 让学生边学歌曲边用手 势表示听到的数字，活跃学 习氛围。接着让学生自主创 编新歌，培养学生的发散性 思维，增强学生的综合语言 运用能力。 245 ▶教学反思 1.歌曲热身，使学生兴致盎然，迅速地投身于学习中。 2.设置的教学活动简单易行，符合三年级学生的年龄特征。 3.以旧带新，可以降低学生的学习难度，使学生在轻松的学习氛围中巩固旧知，学习新知。 4.板书设计条理清晰，一目了然，重点突出。 ▶Teaching Contents & Teaching Aims Start to read ·Be able to find as well as listen, speak, read and write the letters in the picture. ·Be able to build up the connection between the form and the meaning of the words. Let’s check ·Be able to finish the exercises independently. ·Be able to listen, speak and read the words about numbers. Let’s sing ·Be able to understand and sing the song, and make a new song. ▶Teaching Priorities ·Be able to master the letters and the words about numbers. ▶Teaching Difficulties ·Be able to finish the exercises of “Let’s check” independently. ▶Teaching Procedures Teaching Stages Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Warm-up & Revision 1. Greetings. 2. Listen and do. Give instructions. 3. Enjoy a song. Sing the ABC song with students. 1. Greetings. 2. Do the actions according to the instructions. 3. Sing the ABC song with the teacher. The song and the TPR activity can stimulate students’ interest in learning and review the letters and the words about numbers. （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Presentation 1. Look and say. (1)Magic eyes. Show some letters on the PPT. (2)Find and say. Show the picture of “Find and say”. (1)Look and read aloud the letters quickly. (2)Look at the picture and try to find out the most letters. Lead students to review the letters they have learned through looking, finding and saying. 2. Count and match. (1)Count from one to ten. Let students work in groups of ten and count. (2)Find, tick and match. Explain the meaning of the exercise and make a demonstration first. (1)Work in groups of ten and count from one to ten one by one. (2) Finish the exercise of “Find, tick and match” independently. Consolidate and check the learning of the words about numbers. Practice Let’s check. (1)Listen and tick or cross. Show the pictures and lead students to talk about them. Play the recording. Check the answers. (2)Look and circle. Show the picture and lead students to count the things in the picture. (1)Talk about the pictures. Listen to the recording and finish the exercise. (2)Look at the picture and count the number of the things. Circle the right numbers. Use different activities to practice students’ ability of listening, speaking, recognizing and reading. Consolidate the words about numbers. Consolidation & Extension 1. Story time. (1)Show the pictures. Simply introduce the western culture about birthday surprises. (2)Let students act out the story. (1)Look at the pictures and answer the questions. (2)Act out the story. Consolidate the key sentence structures and permeate the western culture. 2. Let’s sing. (1)Play the song. Lead students to show their fingers and sing with the video. (2)Let students make a new song. (1)Listen to the song, show fingers and sing with the video. Practice in groups. Show it to the class. (2)Try to make a new song. Create an active learning environment. Cultivate students’ divergent thinking. Enhance students’ comprehensive language using ability. 247 （续表） Teaching Stages Teacher’ s Activities Students’ Activities Teaching Purposes Homework 1. Sing the number song to your family members. 2. Retell the story of “Story time”. 3. Do the exercises.